1830 Photonic Service Switch 4 (PSS-4) Rel 6.0 Installation and System Turn-Up Guide PDF

Title page
Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PHOTONIC SERVICE SWITCH - 4 (PSS-4)
Installation and System Turn-up Guide
3KC13323AAAATQZZA
Issue 1 | June 2013
| Release 6.0
Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Conformance statements
Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules

Security statement
In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such an event,
applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any
allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
Limited warranty
For terms and conditions of sale, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Team.
Ordering Information
For more ordering information, refer to "How to order" in the section titled "about this document."
Contents
About this document
xix
Purpose ........................................................................................................................................................................................... xix
Intended audience
...................................................................................................................................................................... xix
xix
How to use this document
....................................................................................................................................................... xix
xix
Safety information ....................................................................................................................................................................... xx

xx
Conventions used
....................................................................................................................................................................... xxi
xxi
Related information ................................................................................................................................................................... xxi

xxi
Document support
................................................................................................................................................................... xxiii
xxiii
Technical support ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxiii

xxiii
How to order
............................................................................................................................................................................. xxiii
xxiii
How to comment
1
..................................................................................................................................................................... xxiii
xxiii
Safety
Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1-1
Equipment Installation
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2-1
Before you begin ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2-2
Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 ........................................................................................................... 2-7
2-7
AC Filter Installation and Replacement ......................................................................................................................... 2-18
2-18
Half-slot adapter installation .............................................................................................................................................. 2-23
2-23
Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 .................................................................................... 2-26
2-26
Verify installation and seat packs
..................................................................................................................................... 2-45
2-45
ID module replacement ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-46

2-46
Procedure to connect Rack lamp
...................................................................................................................................... 2-47
2-47
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4
iii
3KC13323AAAATQZZA Release 6.0
Issue 1 June 2013
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Line Driver Port Attributes
................................................................................................................................................. 2-50
2-50
Replacing a card ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-53

2-53
1DPP24M Installation procedures
................................................................................................................................... 2-57
2-57
11DPE12, 11DPE12A and 11DPE12E Installation procedure
.............................................................................. 2-63
2-63
11QPA4 and 11QPA4A Installation procedure ............................................................................................................ 2-68

2-68
11QPE24 Installation procedure ....................................................................................................................................... 2-73
2-73
112PDM11 Installation procedure
................................................................................................................................... 2-76
2-76
4DPA2/4DPA4 Installation Procedure ............................................................................................................................ 2-80

2-80
4QPA8 Installation procedure ............................................................................................................................................ 2-83
2-83
PTPCTL Installation procedures ....................................................................................................................................... 2-87
2-87
PTPIO Installation procedures
.......................................................................................................................................... 2-93
2-93
SPD Shelf Installation procedures

Shelf cover installation
3
................................................................................................................................... 2-97
2-97
...................................................................................................................................................... 2-105
2-105
Fan and air filter installation

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3-1
Fan installation and replacement ......................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3-2
Fan air filter replacement ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-4
3-4
Stand-alone node set-up

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4-1
Required materials .................................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4-2
Preconditioning .......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-6
4-6
Connect to the NE and initialize database
....................................................................................................................... 4-7
4-7
Connect to the NE for CLI access .................................................................................................................................... 4-12

4-12
Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software ......................................................... 4-14
4-14
Set the NE to operate in SDH mode ................................................................................................................................ 4-23
4-23
Set the loopback IP address
................................................................................................................................................ 4-24
4-24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv
Issue 1 June 2013
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure networking information
.................................................................................................................................. 4-26
4-26
Configure GNE for management system access ......................................................................................................... 4-31

4-31
Set the network element date and time ........................................................................................................................... 4-38
4-38
Disable the ES port monitoring ......................................................................................................................................... 4-44
4-44
Firmware Update .................................................................................................................................................................... 4-47
4-47
Update firmware on all circuit packs
Circuit Pack Handling
.............................................................................................................................. 4-49
4-49
.......................................................................................................................................................... 4-49
4-49
Configure additional system properties .......................................................................................................................... 4-55

4-55
Example configuration of FTP server ............................................................................................................................. 4-57
4-57
5
Circuit connections
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5-1
Provision new wavelength service
..................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5-2
Perform power adjustments ................................................................................................................................................ 5-13

5-13
Delete wavelength service ................................................................................................................................................... 5-29
5-29
Provision transponder for connection to an unmanaged network element ........................................................ 5-34
5-34
5-min timer during service turn-up .................................................................................................................................. 5-41
5-41
Configure keyed service on PSS4 Regen link
6
............................................................................................................. 5-46
5-46
System Turn-up and commissioning

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6-1
Network commissioning background ................................................................................................................................ 6-2
6-2
Preconditioning procedure ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
6-5
Establish connection to the network
Provision the system
.................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6-7
............................................................................................................................................................. 6-14
6-14
Commission a FOADM system ........................................................................................................................................ 6-23

6-23
Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines
................................................................................................. 6-42
6-42
Prepare unkeyed FOADM system for additional services ...................................................................................... 6-53

6-53
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
v
Issue 1 June 2013
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set opposite port of Unidirectional Amplifier

Disconnect PC from the Network
Understanding the loss report
............................................................................................................. 6-58
6-58
.................................................................................................................................... 6-59
6-59
............................................................................................................................................ 6-60
6-60
Generate and review system loss report ......................................................................................................................... 6-67

6-67
Troubleshooting failed adjustments ................................................................................................................................. 6-74
6-74
7
Performance verification testing and data retrieval

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7-1
Perform database backups
..................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7-1
Fiber cleaning
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... A-1
A-1
Cleaning optical connectors ................................................................................................................................................. A-3
A-3
Inspecting optical connectors .............................................................................................................................................. A-6
A-6
Cleaning other optical components ................................................................................................................................... A-7
A-7
Tightening torque
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... B-1
B-1
Nominal tightening torques .................................................................................................................................................. B-1
B-1
Glossary
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi
Issue 1 June 2013
List of tables
1
Chapter contents
......................................................................................................................................................... xix
xix
2-1
Office power connection and cable color
2-2
Test and expected results
2-3
Power connection test and Results .................................................................................................................... 2-31
2-4
Shelf ID and Settings
2-5
Timing cable wire pin number description
2-6
E1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable wire diagram
2-7
E1/DS1 2 MHz 1PPS ToD cable wire diagram ............................................................................................ 2-89
4-1
CIT cable pin assignments
4-2
Shelf ID and settings
6-1
Report contents
6-2
Loss value field loss report explanations ........................................................................................................ 6-63
6-3
Notes field terms and definitions ....................................................................................................................... 6-64
6-4
Highlighting loss report rules
6-5
Minimum EPT parameters for network element
6-6
Loss report fields
6-7
Loss report error messages
A-1
Tools for cleaning optical fiber connectors
B-1
Nominal tightening torques ................................................................................................................................... B-1
B-2
Nominal tightening torques when using washers
....................................................................................................... 2-27
...................................................................................................................................... 2-28
............................................................................................................................................. 2-33
.................................................................................................... 2-65
....................................................................................................... 2-88
..................................................................................................................................... 4-2
.............................................................................................................................................. 4-21
4-21
........................................................................................................................................................ 6-62
6-62
............................................................................................................................. 6-65
......................................................................................... 6-67
..................................................................................................................................................... 6-72
6-72
.................................................................................................................................. 6-74
..................................................................................................... A-3
......................................................................................... B-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vii
Issue 1 June 2013
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii
Issue 1 June 2013
List of figures
2-1
PSS-4 slot number label (3KC13252AA) position
....................................................................................... 2-3
2-2
Showing compliance and safety warnings
2-3
eSFP plugged in 112PDM11 with extended cover (3KC13331AAAA)
2-4
Attenuator used on 112PDM11 with extended cover
2-5
E4PFACK card ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-20

2-20
2-6
Half slot adapter install tool - view1
................................................................................................................ 2-24
2-7
Half slot adapter install tool - view2
................................................................................................................ 2-25
2-8
Rear ground attachment point
2-9
Power Cable
2-10
Power cables installed (front cover open)
2-11
Power cables management to the left of the shelf
2-12
Power cables management beneath the shelf
2-13
Shelf ID ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-33

2-33
2-14
Fibers Placement
2-15
Short LC fiber boot ................................................................................................................................................. 2-35

2-35
2-16
Rear ground attachment point
2-17
CA-AC Power supply cable
2-18
Connecting CA-AC cable to AC cable adaptor ............................................................................................ 2-39
2-19
E4PFACK power input port
2-20
E4PFACK power input port - another view
2-21
CA-AC cable routing
............................................................................................................................................. 2-42
2-42
2-22
AC filter switch OFF
............................................................................................................................................. 2-43
2-43
2-23
AC filter switch ON
....................................................................................................... 2-5
............................................. 2-16
................................................................................ 2-17
............................................................................................................................ 2-26
.............................................................................................................................................................. 2-28
2-28
...................................................................................................... 2-29
....................................................................................... 2-30
................................................................................................ 2-31
..................................................................................................................................................... 2-34
2-34
............................................................................................................................ 2-37
................................................................................................................................ 2-38
................................................................................................................................ 2-40
.................................................................................................. 2-41
............................................................................................................................................... 2-44
2-44
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ix
Issue 1 June 2013
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-24
Cable - Rack lamp connection ............................................................................................................................ 2-47
2-25
TRU - connectors location
2-26
TRU front view
2-27
Bi-directional amplifier ......................................................................................................................................... 2-50

2-50
2-28
Uni-directional amplifier
2-29
Set opposite direction port
................................................................................................................................... 2-51
2-30
Create external connection
.................................................................................................................................. 2-52
2-31
E1 cable
2-32
E1 pin assignment table
2-33
E1 wire diagram
2-34
11DPE12 card face plate
2-35
11DPE12A card views ........................................................................................................................................... 2-64
2-36
11DPE12E card face plate
................................................................................................................................... 2-64
2-37
Timing cable wire diagram
.................................................................................................................................. 2-65
2-38
PSS4 shelf view
2-39
11QPA4 card views
2-40
Lock the card
2-41
Angled boot fiber connector
2-42
Connect fibers to ports
2-43
Ports linked by jumpers
2-44
11QPE24 card views
2-45
PSS4 shelf view
....................................................................................................................................................... 2-74
2-74
2-46
112PDM11 Card
...................................................................................................................................................... 2-76
2-76
2-47
Card locked in place ............................................................................................................................................... 2-77

2-77
2-48
2-49
Fibers connected to ports ...................................................................................................................................... 2-78
2-50
Shelf cover ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-79

2-79
................................................................................................................................... 2-48
........................................................................................................................................................ 2-49
2-49
...................................................................................................................................... 2-50
2-50
...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-58
2-58
........................................................................................................................................ 2-58
...................................................................................................................................................... 2-59
2-59
...................................................................................................................................... 2-63
....................................................................................................................................................... 2-66
2-66
................................................................................................................................................ 2-68
............................................................................................................................................................ 2-69
2-69
............................................................................................................................... 2-70
.......................................................................................................................................... 2-70
........................................................................................................................................ 2-71
.............................................................................................................................................. 2-73
............................................................................................................................... 2-78
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x
Issue 1 June 2013
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-51
4DPA2 card face plate
........................................................................................................................................... 2-80
2-52
Lock the card - 4DPA2 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-81
2-53
4QPA8 card
2-54

2-84
2-55
2-56
2-57
Shelf cover ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-86

2-86
2-58
PTPCTL card overview
2-59
E1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable ................................................................................................................................... 2-88
2-60
E1/DS1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable
2-61

2-90
2-62
2-63
2-64
Shelf cover ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-92

2-92
2-65
LC adaptors
2-66
LC interface assignments
2-67

2-95
2-68
2-69
2-70
Shelf cover ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-96

2-96
2-71
SPD installation for a 19 inch ANSI rack
...................................................................................................... 2-97
2-72
SPD installation for a 23 inch ANSI rack
...................................................................................................... 2-98
2-73
Bay frame ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-99

2-99
2-74
Power supply cable
2-75
Plugging the connector
2-76
Cable tie
2-77
SPD unit connects to the AC filter
............................................................................................................................................................... 2-83
2-83
............................................................................................................................... 2-85
........................................................................................................................................ 2-87
........................................................................................................................ 2-89
............................................................................................................................... 2-91
............................................................................................................................................................... 2-93
2-93
..................................................................................................................................... 2-94
2-94
............................................................................................................................... 2-95
.............................................................................................................................................. 2-100
....................................................................................................................................... 2-101
................................................................................................................................................................... 2-102
2-102
................................................................................................................. 2-102
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xi
Issue 1 June 2013
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-78
AC filter switch - OFF status
........................................................................................................................... 2-103
2-79
AC filter switch - ON status
............................................................................................................................. 2-104
3-1
1830 PSS-4 fan module ........................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3-2
Air filter removal
4-1
CIT cable
4-2
New CIT cable
............................................................................................................................................................ 4-3
4-3
4-3
New CIT cable
............................................................................................................................................................ 4-4
4-4
4-4
PC command window
4-5
Login Screen
4-6
WebUI invalid database warning
4-7
WebUI NE name prompt
4-8
WebUI NE restart progress window ................................................................................................................. 4-10
4-9
Windows Firewall settings ................................................................................................................................... 4-16
4-10
Default route box ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-27

4-27
4-11
Default route
4-12
OSPF settings
4-13
Create OSPF Area
4-14
New OSPF area created
4-15
WebUI OAMP port provisioning
4-16
WebUI IP routes menu
4-17
WebUI IP routes window
4-18
WebUI Create IP route window
4-19
WebUI IP routes window with new route
4-20
NTP Servers screen
4-21
Create NTP Server screen
4-22
Network Time Protocol Properties screen
4-23
Firmware
....................................................................................................................................................... 3-5
3-5
...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4-3
.............................................................................................................................................. 4-7
............................................................................................................................................................... 4-8
4-8
......................................................................................................................... 4-9
...................................................................................................................................... 4-10
............................................................................................................................................................. 4-27
4-27
........................................................................................................................................................... 4-28
4-28
................................................................................................................................................... 4-29
4-29
........................................................................................................................................ 4-29
...................................................................................................................... 4-32
.......................................................................................................................................... 4-33
..................................................................................................................................... 4-34
......................................................................................................................... 4-35
...................................................................................................... 4-36
................................................................................................................................................ 4-40
4-40
.................................................................................................................................... 4-41
..................................................................................................... 4-42
.................................................................................................................................................................... 4-47
4-47
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii
Issue 1 June 2013
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-24
Circuit pack handling - Example 1
................................................................................................................... 4-50
4-25
................................................................................................................... 4-50
4-26
................................................................................................................... 4-51
4-27
................................................................................................................... 4-51
4-28
Improper handling of the circuit pack - Example 5
.................................................................................... 4-52
4-29
Improper handling of the circuit pack - Example 6
.................................................................................... 4-53
4-30
Proper LC Connector Handling
4-31
Broken OSC Fibers
4-32
FileZilla connect to server window
4-33
FileZilla server window
4-34
FileZilla groups menu
4-35
FileZilla groups window ....................................................................................................................................... 4-60
4-36
FileZilla add group window
4-37
FileZilla groups shared folders window
4-38
FileZilla browse folder window ......................................................................................................................... 4-63
4-39
FileZilla users menu ............................................................................................................................................... 4-64

4-64
4-40
FileZilla users window
4-41
FileZilla add user window
4-42
FileZilla users shared folders window ............................................................................................................. 4-67
4-43
FileZilla browse folder window ......................................................................................................................... 4-68
5-1
1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu
5-2
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology window
5-3
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology connect button .......................................................... 5-4
5-4
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE inventory window ................................................................................ 5-5
5-5
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM unassigned port menu
5-6
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM assign client port .......................................................................................... 5-6
5-7
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM client admin status up menu
......................................................................................................................... 4-54
................................................................................................................................................ 4-54
4-54
.................................................................................................................. 4-58
........................................................................................................................................ 4-59
4-59
........................................................................................................................................... 4-60
4-60
................................................................................................................................ 4-61
......................................................................................................... 4-62
.......................................................................................................................................... 4-65
4-65
................................................................................................................................... 4-66
........................................................................................................... 5-2
....................................................................... 5-3
................................................................................ 5-6
.................................................................... 5-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiii
Issue 1 June 2013
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-8
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service menu
..................................................... 5-8
5-9
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 1 ..................................................... 5-9
5-10
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 2
.................................................. 5-10
5-11
.................................................. 5-11
5-12
.................................................. 5-12
5-13
.................................................. 5-12
5-14
1354 RM-PhM power management service
5-15
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment .................................................................................... 5-15
5-16
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment .................................................................................... 5-16
5-17
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power level reading .................................................................................. 5-17
5-18
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM channel powers menu selection
5-19
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM all channel powers
5-20
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM set power gain
5-21
1354 RM-PhM power level reading ................................................................................................................. 5-22
5-22
5-23
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM channel powers menu selection
5-24
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM all channel powers
5-25
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM set power gain
5-26
1354 RM-PhM all channel powers
5-27
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power management provisioning
5-28
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM delete button
5-29
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power management provisioning
5-30
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu
5-31
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision topology window
5-32
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology disconnect button
5-33
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology disconnect warning
5-34
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE inventory window
.................................................................................................. 5-14
........................................................... 5-18
.................................................................................... 5-19
............................................................................................ 5-20
........................................................... 5-25
.................................................................................... 5-26
............................................................................................ 5-27
................................................................................................................... 5-28
........................................................ 5-29
............................................................................................... 5-30
........................................................ 5-30
......................................................................... 5-31
.................................................................. 5-32
................................................. 5-33
.............................................. 5-33
............................................................................. 5-35
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiv
Issue 1 June 2013
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-35
1354 RM-PhM unassigned port menu ............................................................................................................. 5-36
5-36
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM assign client port
5-37
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM define ITU channel ................................................................................... 5-37
5-38
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE programmed network output power
5-39
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu
5-40
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM create unmanaged external connection
5-41
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM unmanaged connection warning
.......................................................... 5-40
5-42
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM enter external topology window
.......................................................... 5-41
5-43
An example of network service
5-44
An example of turn-up process for an auto-power managed and auto-keyed service
5-45
1830 PSS-4 Regen bus link
6-1
Decomposition of mesh network into constituent systems
6-2
1354 RM-PhM login screen
6-3
1354 RM-PhM new server/port window
.......................................................................................................... 6-9
6-4
1354 RM-PhM new server/port window
........................................................................................................ 6-10
6-5
1354 RM-PhM topology view screen .............................................................................................................. 6-10
6-6
1354 RM-PhM auto discovery settings
........................................................................................................... 6-11
6-7
1354 RM-PhM create network element
.......................................................................................................... 6-12
6-8
1354 RM-PhM newly discovered NEs
.......................................................................................................... 6-13
6-9
CPB login window .................................................................................................................................................. 6-15

6-15
6-10
CPB main window .................................................................................................................................................. 6-16

6-16
6-11
CPB provision system wizard overview ......................................................................................................... 6-17
6-12
1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard options
6-13
1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard select planning tool output file
6-14
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision system node list
6-15
1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard stages
6-16
Commissioning service for a FOADM system
....................................................................................... 5-36
........................................... 5-38
......................................................................... 5-39
............................................. 5-40
........................................................................................................................ 5-42
................... 5-43
................................................................................................................................. 5-46
........................................................................ 6-3
.................................................................................................................................. 6-9
........................................................................................ 6-18
.......................................... 6-19
..................................................................... 6-20
.......................................................................................... 6-21
............................................................................................ 6-24
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xv
Issue 1 June 2013
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-17
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM wavelength service provisioning completion
................................. 6-25
6-18
1354 RM-PhM wavelength services
6-19
1354 RM-PhM power A-Z button ..................................................................................................................... 6-26
6-20
1354 RM-PhM power adjust ............................................................................................................................... 6-27
6-21
1354 RM-PhM set commissioning flag message
6-22
1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment ................................................................................................................... 6-29
6-23
1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment ................................................................................................................... 6-30
6-24
1354 RM-PhM power level reading ................................................................................................................. 6-32
6-25
1354 RM-PhM power adjust menu
6-26
1354 RM-PhM facility/connection window .................................................................................................. 6-34
6-27
6-28
6-29
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power adjust menu
6-30
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM facility/connection window ................................................................... 6-40
6-31
Commissioning service for a FOADM system
6-32
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM per channel target output power
6-33
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM adjust output power .................................................................................. 6-46
6-34
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM wavelength services list
6-35
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power gain adjustment
6-36
6-37
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM per channel target output power
6-38
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM adjust output power .................................................................................. 6-55
6-39
.......................................................................... 6-56
6-40
Shows a section of the loss report for a span and a node
......................................................................... 6-61
6-41
CPB Create system loss report overview
6-42
CPB Create system loss report select planning tool file
........................................................................... 6-68
6-43
CPB Create system loss report stages progress window
.......................................................................... 6-69
................................................................................................................ 6-26
........................................................................................ 6-28
.................................................................................................................. 6-33
................................................................................... 6-39
............................................................................................ 6-43
.......................................................... 6-45
.......................................................................... 6-47
............................................................................ 6-48
.......................................................................... 6-50
.......................................................... 6-54
....................................................................................................... 6-68
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi
Issue 1 June 2013
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-44
CPB Create system loss report last page
........................................................................................................ 6-70
6-45
CPB sample loss report
7-1
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM settings menu
7-2
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM file transfer window
7-3
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup menu
7-4
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup
7-5
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup details menu
7-6
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup icon ............................................................................................ 7-5
......................................................................................................................................... 6-71
................................................................................................ 7-2
................................................................................... 7-3
......................................................................................... 7-4
..................................................................................................... 7-4
........................................................................... 7-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvii
Issue 1 June 2013
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xviii
Issue 1 June 2013
About this document

About this document
Purpose
This manual provides instructions for installation, turn-up and testing of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 4 (PSS-4).
Intended audience
This installation manual portion of this document is for personnel who will install
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 equipment. The System Turn-up and Test (also called
Integration) is for personnel who will integrate the NEs into a complete network.
This manual is intended ONLY for use in a central office environment in Network
Equipment Building Standards (NEBS) installations and for installation and testing
performed prior to turnover to central office personnel.
How to use this document
This manual is divided into six parts each containing several chapters. The first part
explains the installation sequence at a high level. It is useful to the trained installer or job
planner. The other parts provide instructional steps for personnel needing additional detail
or background information. The chapters in each part are numbered in the order which
they are to be performed.
Chapter contents
Table 1
Chapter contents
Chapter
Contents
Chapter 1, Safety
This chapter describes the components of

safety statements that appear in this document.
Chapter 2, Equipment Installation
This chapter describes how to install and equip

a network element (NE) to get it ready to
operate in the network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xix
Issue 1 June 2013
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1
Chapter contents
(continued)
Chapter
Contents
Chapter 3, Fan and air filter installation
This chapter provides instructions for

installation and replacement of the fan and air
filter.
Chapter 4, Stand-alone node set-up
This chapter describes how to provision an

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch-4 (PSS-4) network element (NE).
Chapter 5, Circuit connections
The procedures in this chapter should be used

when adding new wavelength services to an
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 network.
Chapter 6, System Turn-up and

commissioning
This chapter provides the detailed procedures

required to commission the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-4 network using the Alcatel-Lucent
1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager (1354
RM-PhM) along with the Commissioning and
Power Balancing (CPB) tool.
Chapter 7, Performance verification testing

and data retrieval
The procedures in this chapter helps you

perform final verification on the network after
commissioning is complete.
Appendix A, Fiber cleaning
This chapter describes the Alcatel-Lucent

recommended method for the cleaning and
inspection of optical connectors using specific
tools and materials that have been proven to be
effective in the assembly and testing of optical
transmission equipment.
Appendix B, Tightening torque
The listed tightening torque values are to be

used for all fasteners on the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS).
Glossary
Defines terms used throughout the

documentation.
Index
Provides detailed access to the contents of this

document.
Safety information
For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at
points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to
follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xx
Issue 1 June 2013
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Conventions used
Appearance
Description
Italicized text
File and directory names
Emphasized information
Titles of publications
A value that the user supplies
Text that is displayed in a graphical user

interface or in a hardware label
The name of a key on the keyboard
Graphical user interface text or key

name
input text
Command names and text that the user types or

selects as input to a system
output text
Text that a system displays or prints
Related information
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch-4 (PSS-4) Installation and System
turn-up Guide is part of a set of documents that support Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS
products. The following items are available:
Document Number
Document Title
3KC-13324-AAAA-TQZZA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 4 (PSS-4)

Release 6.0 Product Information and Planning Guide

Release 6.0 User Provisioning Guide

Release 6.0 TL1 Commands and Messages Guide

Product Family Release 6.0 Documentation Library
PSS documents
8DG-61259-AAAA-TQZZA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16

(PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Product
Information and Planning Guide
8DG-61259-AAAA-TCZZA

(PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 User Provisioning
Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxi
Issue 1 June 2013
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Document Number
Document Title
8DG-61259-AAAA-TMZZA

(PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Maintenance and
Trouble-Clearing Guide
8DG-61259-AAAA-THZZA

(PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Command Line
Interface Guide
8DG-61259-AAAA-TGZZA

(PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Photonics TL1
Commands and Messages Guide
8DG-61259-AAAA-TFZZA

(PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Switching TL1
Commands and Messages Guide
8DG-61259-AAAA-TJZZA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16

(PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Installation and System
Turn-Up Guide
8DG-61259-AAAA-TKZZA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36

(PSS-36) Release 6.0 Installation and System Turn-Up
Guide (Photonics and Switching)
8DG-61259-AAAA-TLZZA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 64

(PSS-64) Release 6.0 Installation and System Turn-Up
Guide (Switching)
8DG-61259-AAAA-TAZZA

(PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Safety Guide
8DG-61259-AAAA-TEZZA

(PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Engineering and
Planning Tool User Guide
8DG-61688-TAAA-TQZZA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager

Release 9.1 EMS Reference Guide
3KC27912AAAA

Release 1.9.0 MSAH Edge Device User Guide
8DG60418LAAA

Release 2.7.0 GBEH Edge Device User Guide
3KC27912BAAA

Release 1.9.0 MD4H Edge Device User Guide
8DG60386JAAA

Release 1.0.0 AHP Amplifier User Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxii
Issue 1 June 2013
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Document Number
Document Title
8DG60013MAAA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16

(PSS-32/PSS-16) RAMAN Amplifier and EDFA Release
3.5.0 User Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Versatile WDM Module (VWM)

Release 6.0 Product Information and Planning Guide
8DG-61259-AAAA-TZZZA
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Product Family Release 6.0

Documentation Library
Note: This Documentation library does not include the EPT User Guide. This is published
on separate media.
Document support
Alcatel-Lucent provides a referral telephone number for document support. Use this
number to report errors or to ask questions about the document. This is a nontechnical
number. The referral number is 1 (888) 727 3615 (continental United States) or +1 (630)
713 5000 (for all countries).
Technical support
For technical support, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team. See the
Alcatel-Lucent Support web site (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support/) for contact
information.
Login to OnLine Customer Support (OLCS) at http://support.alcatel-lucent.com and
select your country from the menu under "Product Technical Support - Phone and E-mail
Contact Information".
How to order
Contact your local sales representative, or login to OLCS at http://support.alcatellucent.com and select your product from the menu under "Technical Content for".
How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatellucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxiii
Issue 1 June 2013
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxiv
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
1
Structure of safety statements

Overview
This topic describes the components of safety statements that appear in this document.
General structure
Safety statements include the following structural elements:
E
L
P
M
CAUTION
Lifting hazard
SA
Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injury

due to the size and weight of the equipment.
Always use three people or a lifting device to transport

and position this equipment.
[ABC123]
F
G
H
Item
Structure element
Purpose
Safety alert symbol
Indicates the potential for personal injury

(optional)
Safety symbol
Indicates hazard type (optional)
Signal word
Indicates the severity of the hazard
Hazard type
Describes the source of the risk of damage or

injury
Safety message
Consequences if protective measures fail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-1
Issue 1 June 2013
Safety
Structure of safety statements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Item
Structure element
Purpose
Avoidance message
Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard
Identifier
The reference ID of the safety statement

(optional)
Signal words
The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:

Signal word
Meaning
DANGER
Indicates an extremely hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will

result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2
Issue 1 June 2013
2
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes how to install and equip a network element (NE) to get it ready to
operate in the network.
Contents
Before you begin
2-2
Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4
2-7
AC Filter Installation and Replacement
2-18
Half-slot adapter installation
2-23
Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4
2-26
2-45
ID module replacement
2-46
2-47
2-50
Replacing a card
2-53
2-57
2-63
11QPA4 and 11QPA4A Installation procedure
2-68
11QPE24 Installation procedure
2-73
2-76
4DPA2/4DPA4 Installation Procedure
2-80
4QPA8 Installation procedure
2-83
PTPCTL Installation procedures
2-87
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-1
Issue 1 June 2013
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-93
2-97
2-105
Before you begin

Before you begin
Prior to performing any procedures in this chapter, review Structure of safety

statements (p. 1-1).
Note: Any command Line Interface (CLI) commands associated with implementing
procedures are listed in this chapter. CLI commands are in bold type text and are
entered by the user performing the procedures; example: <CTRL>B Go back one
character on the CLI screen display.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-2
Issue 1 June 2013
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-1 PSS-4 slot number label (3KC13252AA) position
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-3
Issue 1 June 2013
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-4
Issue 1 June 2013
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety labeling
Figure 2-2 Showing compliance and safety warnings
Figure 2-2, Showing compliance and safety warnings (p. 2-5) shows the Alcatel-Lucent
labeling on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 that provides compliance and safety warnings.
System installation overview
To install an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4, perform the following steps:
Rack installation of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 (p. 2-7)

Powering and provisioning an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 (p. 2-26)
Verify installation and seat packs (p. 2-45)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-5
Issue 1 June 2013
Before you begin
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use information from other maintenance procedures in this chapter as needed to complete
physical installation. See Software setup and configuration in User Provisioning Guide
for the procedures needed to configure and place the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 in
service.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-6
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before you begin
Mounting kits are available with the hardware needed to install Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-4 in a standard EIA, ANSI, or ETSI equipment rack. For details and ordering
information, see 1830 PSS-4 installation kits in Product Information and Planning Guide.
Procedure for ETSI equipment rack
Complete the following steps to install Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 in an ETSI equipment
rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check the ESD and ground label on the ETSI rack mounting ears (P/N
3KC13334AAAA) as shown in the following figure. Check the ESD port
(P/N:1AB024360006) fixed properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Determine the mounting location.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-7
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attach the ETSI rack mounting ears (P/N 3KC13334AAAA) to right side of the 1830
PSS-4 shelf, using four-M3 screws (P/N 1AD009040012) per side.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-8
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attach the ETSI cable management assembly (P/N 3KC13057AAAB) to the left side of
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 shelf, with four M3 screws (P/N 1AD009040012), as
shown in the following figure:
Refer to the eSFP cable management (p. 2-14) for more information on eSFP cable
management in ETSI racks.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mount the 1830 PSS-4 shelf in an ETSI rack, using two-M6x12 screws (P/N
1AD009150001) per side.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-9
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure for ANSI equipment rack
Complete the following steps to install Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 in an ANSI equipment
rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check the ESD and GROUND label on the ANSI rack mounting ears (P/N
3KC13338AAAA) as shown in the following figure. Check the ESD port
(P/N:1AB024360006) fixed properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-10
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attach ANSI rack mounting ears (P/N 3KC13338AAAA) to the right side of the 1830
PSS-4 shelf, using four-M3 screws (P/N 1AD009040012) per side.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attach the 23 cable management assembly (P/N 3KC13056AAAB) to the left side of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 shelf, with four M3 screws (P/N 1AD009040012), as shown
in the following figure:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-11
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mount the 1830 PSS-4 shelf in an ANSI 23 rack, using two 12-24 screws (P/N
1AD139920001) per side.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Procedure for EIA equipment rack
Complete the following steps to install Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 in an EIA (19")
equipment rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check the ESD and GROUND label on the EIA mounting ear (P/N 3KC13336AAAA) as
shown in the following figure. Check the ESD port (P/N:1AB024360006) fixed properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-12
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attach 19 EIA rack mounting ears (P/N 3KC13336AAAA) to the right side of the 1830
PSS-4 shelf, using four-M3 screws (P/N 1AD009040012) per side as shown in the
following figure:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-13
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attach the 19 cable management assembly (P/N 3KC13055AAAB) to the left side of the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 shelf , with four M3 screws (P/N 1AD009040012) as shown
in the following figure:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mount the 1830 PSS-4 shelf in the EIA rack, using two 12-24 screws (P/N
1AD139920001) per side.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
eSFP cable management
The PSS-4 shelf has an open space of 44 mm between the Card and the standard front
cover (3KC12890AA**) as shown in the following figure:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-14
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The RJ-45 boot has a length of 25mm with a space of 44mm between the card and the
standard front cover. This leaves a space of 10 mm which is the space available for
bending the STP cable. This is less than its threshold -4xOD (normal).
Note: There are several thresholds for STP cable, local field support engineer should
check before deployment.
If the Bending radius is less than the threshold, it may have a negative impact on its
functioning.
The possible solutions to resolve this problem are listed in the following:
1. Use the shortest RJ-45 boot from Tyco (11mm) with standard front cover
(3KC12890AA**); the cable management space increases by 7mm, although the
bending radius is still less than its threshold.
2. Remove the ETSI rack door and the front cover.
3. Use extended cover (3KC13331AAAA) installed on ANSI, EIA or ETSI (without
rack door) rack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-15
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-3 eSFP plugged in 112PDM11 with extended cover (3KC13331AAAA)
SDI SFP cable management
The SDI SFP is supported by PSS-4, under this case, extended cover (3KC13331AAAA)
may be used. Local support engineer should pay attention to the space between the card
and the front cover basing the bending radius of the cable. An example picture is shown
below:
Attenuator usage
Using Normal front cover (3KC12890AA**) or installed on ETSI rack with rack door,
attenuator can not be used.
Using Extended front cover (3KC13331AAAA) or installed on ETSI rack without rack
door, attenuator can be used with angle or short boot fiber.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-16
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-4 Attenuator used on 112PDM11 with extended cover
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-17
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

AC filter installation procedure
Complete the following steps to install and AC filter.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the AC filter 3KC12834AAAA in ESD bag and set it aside nearby so that you can
immediately continue with Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Grasp AC filter with one hand on the faceplate and the other on the bottom.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-18
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Slide the card along the card guides into the slot. When the card is partially inserted, keep
the eject handle open and grasp the card by the retaining screws in both sides as shown in
the following figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that no fibers from adjacent cards are in the way, and slide the card into the slot.
You will encounter some resistance when the card contacts the backplane. Use gentle
force to fully seat the card on the backplane.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-19
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Lock the card into place by closing the eject handle. As the eject handle close, it turning
as card contacts the backplane. Push the eject handle towards faceplate, further seating
the card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Completely tighten the retaining screws, but do not over tighten it.
Figure 2-5 E4PFACK card
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-20
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AC Filter replacement procedure
Complete the following steps to replace the AC filter.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Turn the switch of the AC filter 'OFF' with 0# screw driver.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect the cable CA-AC power supply from the outlet of AC power supply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Press the tab on the connector of AC CABLE ADAPTOR and pull it out from power
input port of AC filter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loosen the retaining screws on both the sides.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-21
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Pull the eject handle of AC filter, and AC card is pushed out by eject handle. As the card
is partially pulled out, grasp the card by the retaining screws in both sides and pull the
card fully out.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-22
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before you begin
The customer order and rack face drawings show where the circuit packs need to be
installed. Some circuit packs are half height and half slot adapters. Half-slot adapters
shown in the following figure are necessary to install these circuit packs. Install all the
adapters first, before installing any other flexible circuit packs. For Equipment installing
on 19 European Rack, the white hook on 19 ETSI cable management
(3KC13070AAAB) must be removed before installing the second half slot adaptor in
PSS-4 chassis.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the sub-rack power is turned off at the power filters in slot 2 and slot 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect the power cables which connect to power filters in slot 2 and slot 3 from main
power supply or the power supply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to the Rack face drawing for the site to determine where half-slot adapters are
required to be placed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Slide the half-slot adapter in the middle of the chassis as shown in the following figure.
View from the side to ensure that it does not touch any of the electrical components on
the backplane or any other circuit packs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-23
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that the half-slot adapter is well seated on dock, and secure it with a 13 (or
longer) #2 Phillips screw driver (with 13 or 330 mm shank or longer) as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 2-6 Half slot adapter install tool - view1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-24
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-7 Half slot adapter install tool - view2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat steps 4 through 5 till all the required adapters are installed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-25
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Powering and provisioning procedure for DC
Complete the following steps to apply power and provision Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 is suitable for Common Building Network (CBN) or Isolated
Building Network (IBN) applications. GR-295-CORE requirements apply for IBN
applications.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect shelf ground wire, if applicable, to the back of the 1830 PSS-4. A ground cable is
not included with the equipment and must be supplied separately. The ground wire should
be 14 AWG (2.0 mm2 cross-section) at a minimum and have a FCI/Burndy
YAV10-2TC10, or equivalent, 14 AWG two-hole lug with 0.625 inch spacing.
Note: Use only the M4 screws provided with the equipment for attaching the ground
cable to the rear of the chassis. Screws longer than 8 mm can damage the equipment.
Figure 2-8 Rear ground attachment point
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-26
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Bay frame is properly prepared for grounding by removing all paint and non-conductive
coatings, exposing bare metal at ground lug attachment point. Bare metal must be clean
and coated with anti-oxidant prior to attaching ground lug.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect one end of customer-provided copper ground cable to bay frame using only
thread-forming shelf mounting screws and customer-provided lug.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Measure resistance between the case of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 and the CBN or IBN.
The resistance must be less than 1 ohm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that power supply for device is shut off at BDFB.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect A and B power cables to customer provided power supply cables using table
Table 2-1, Office power connection and cable color (p. 2-27).
Note: In Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4, the battery return conductor is an Isolated DC
return (DC-I).
Table 2-1
Office power connection and cable color
Office power connection
Cable color
A Battery -
Blue
A Return +
Red
A Ground
Black (NAR)
Yellow/Green (ETSI)
B Battery -
Blue
B Return +
Red
B Ground
Black (NAR)
Yellow/Green (ETSI)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-27
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Test continuity of A and B power cables using Table 2-2, Test and expected results
(p. 2-28) for each cable.
Figure 2-9 Power Cable
Table 2-2
Test and expected results
Test point 1
Test point 2
Expected measurement
Pin 1
Pin 3
Open circuit
Pin 3
Pin 2
Minimal closed circuit, dependent on wire

length (~1 ohm)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-28
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect power cables to power filters. Route cables to the left to provide access to filter
ports and for air filter replacement.
Figure 2-10 Power cables installed (front cover open)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-29
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-11 Power cables management to the left of the shelf
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-30
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-12 Power cables management beneath the shelf
Note: The power cables management depends on the rack space. The pictorial
illustrations in Figure 2-11, Power cables management to the left of the shelf
(p. 2-30) and Figure 2-12, Power cables management beneath the shelf
(p. 2-31) shows the two different methods of managing the power cables.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Turn on A and B power at BDFB and verify power connection using Table 2-3, Power
connection test and Results (p. 2-31).
Table 2-3
Power connection test and Results
Test
Expected Results
Shut off power A at BDFB, with

corresponding power B turned on
Power Filter A status LED extinguishes

Power Filter B status LED remains lit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-31
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-3
Power connection test and Results
(continued)
Test
Expected Results
Shut off power B at BDFB, with

corresponding power A turned on
Power Filter B status LED extinguishes

Power Filter A status LED remains lit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Turn off A and B power at BDFB.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Insert a half-slot pack adapter in the filter slot next to the Equipment Controller. There are
two sizes of filter packs, full size and half size. Half-size packs require that a half-size
pack adapter be installed prior to inserting the filter pack(s). To install the half-size pack
adapter, refer to Half-slot adapter installation (p. 2-23) for the detailed procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Insert OTs as specified by the client. First insert an OT in the lower OT slot, then insert an
OT in the upper OT slot. When inserting a OT in the upper OT slot, EC/SFC/SFD should
be lifted to avoid conflict.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
Install EC and any required SFD/SFC filters.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Insert blanks in any unused slots. If no circuit pack is installed, insert the full-size blank.
For SFC/D full/half slot blank, they should be fastened.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-32
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
Set the Shelf ID using Shelf ID selector switch on lower left of shelf. Choose from the
options in Table 2-4, Shelf ID and Settings (p. 2-33).
Figure 2-13 Shelf ID
Table 2-4
Shelf ID and Settings
Shelf
Shelf ID setting
Master
Peer shelf 1
Peer shelf 2
Peer shelf 3
Peer shelf 4
Peer shelf 5
Peer shelf 6
Peer shelf 7
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
Verify that the PSS-4 FAN and air filter is installed (see Fan air filter replacement
(p. 3-4)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-33
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
Connect shelf to shelf with cross-over Ethernet cables, routing cables to the left of the
shelf.
Daisy chain (inter-shelf DCN) protection is NOT supported for 1830 PSS-4 multi-shelf
configurations. The Close Loop connection of the daisy chain is strictly forbidden to
avoid dangerous DCN network storming. (See Multi-shelf NE configuration in Product
Information and Planning Guide.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
Insert XFPs and SFPs, as applicable, using shelf-specific documentation from the
customer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
Inspect and clean the XFP/SFP modules after insertion.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
Inspect, clean (as needed), and connect fibers to all required ports, per shelf-specific
customer documentation. For ILAs, turn angled boot fibers downward, then back to the
left of the shelf with enough bent radius. Also it is recommended to use Scotch tapes to
hold fiber together in an appropriate way as shown in the following figure.
Note: Only fibers with 40 degree angled boot are allowed. Straight boot fibers may
conflict with the front cover of the shelf. Short boot application should be checked
with local field support engineers before deployment.
Figure 2-14 Fibers Placement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-34
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21
Fiber slack is neatly coiled, using the hook-and-loop fasteners included in the installation
kit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22
Turn on A and B power at BDFB.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Fiber connectors
In general, the type of fiber jumper used with Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 depends on the
type of rack (bay or cabinet) the equipment is installed. Commonly, Fiber jumpers used
with ETSI racks need to have a short, straight fiber boot as shown in Figure 2-15, Short
LC fiber boot (p. 2-35)to eliminate any interference between the fiber jumper sand the
ETSI cabinet door. Fiber jumpers used with ANSI or EIA racks need to have angled fiber
boots as shown in Fiber connectors (p. 2-36). It is important that the right fiber jumpers
be ordered based on the type of rack being used.
Figure 2-15 Short LC fiber boot
Straight short boot. 35 mm maximum from tip of fiber to back edge of boot.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-35
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
40 degree angled. Must rotate 360 degrees without damaging fiber. 53.1 mm max. from
fiber tip to back edge of boot.
Powering and provisioning procedure for AC
Complete the following steps to apply power from AC supply.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
applications.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
be 14 AWG (2.0 mm2 cross-section) at a minimum and have a FCI/Burndy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-36
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cable to the rear of the chassis. Screws longer than 8 mm can damage the equipment.
Figure 2-16 Rear ground attachment point
Bay frame is properly prepared for grounding by removing all paint and non-conductive
coatings, exposing bare metal at ground lug attachment point. Bare metal must be clean
and coated with anti-oxidant prior to attaching ground lug.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect one end of customer-provided copper ground cable to bay frame using only
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that the AC filter is properly installed in Slot2/Slot3.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-37
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unpack the cable CA-AC Power Supply (3KC05127AXAA, X is variant for cable type, it
depends on type of installation kits) and AC CABLE ADAPTOR 3KC13016AAAA from
installation kit.
Figure 2-17 CA-AC Power supply cable
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure no sides of these two items are connecting either power supply or AC filter cards.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-38
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect the outlet of the cable CA-AC Power supply and AC CABLE ADAPTOR, and
ensure that the connection is reliable as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-18 Connecting CA-AC cable to AC cable adaptor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-39
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Plug the connector of AC CABLE ADAPTOR into power input port of AC filter and
ensure that the connection is reliable as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-19 E4PFACK power input port
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-40
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-20 E4PFACK power input port - another view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-41
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Route the cable and secure towards AC power supply. Place the plug of the cable CA-AC
Power Supply near the outlet of AC power supply. Do not plug it into AC power outlet
before following steps.
Figure 2-21 CA-AC cable routing
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Ensure that the cable routing near AC filter is not too tight.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-42
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Ensure that the switch of AC filter is in OFF status. If not, use No.0 screw driver to turn
it off as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-22 AC filter switch OFF
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
Verify that the designated AC power source outlet is surge protected. Refer to Power
filters in Product Information and Planning Guide for the AC power source specification.
Reference the site engineering specification for any additional site specific AC
requirements. Connect the other end of the cable CA-AC Power Supply to the outlet of
AC power supply.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-43
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Turn the switch of AC filter ON with No.0 screw driver as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 2-23 AC filter switch ON
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-44
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Objective
Ensure that the NE has been installed as described in the previous procedures and is ready
for initial setup.
Note: If EC/SFC/SFD is seated in their respective slots, then to facilitate the
installation of OT/LD cards beneath the EC, ensure the screws on the faceplate of the
EC/SFC/SFD are fastened securely.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to the site documentation and verify that all modules are present and slotted
correctly. Verify that the fibers are properly run between packs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check all power and electrical cabling to be sure that they are run properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If there are multiple shelves, verify that shelf ID settings and LAN cables are correctly
linked between the shelves.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the shelf is powered up and the green led is lit on both power filter modules.
Verify that the fans are running.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-45
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Unlike the user panel for the 1830 PSS-32, the 1830 PSS-4 ID module can only be
replaced when the unit is powered down. The 1830 PSS-4 ID module has an EPROM that
contains the serial number and information to retain remote access capability in the event
of a database loss, similar to a user panel in the 1830 PSS-32.
ID module replacement procedure
Note: When restarting after replacement of an ID module on an NE that has been

powered down, the new ID module will cause the NE to appear as though it has never
been commissioned. To preserve traffic during the restart, the NE database should
NOT be initialized. Instead, a previously backed up database is restored to the NE
after the restart.
Use the following procedure to replace an ID module on an 1830 PSS-4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reprovision the NE Name for the NE. This can be done during the initial connection to
the NE with the WebUI, or using the CLI command: config general name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reprovision the loopback IP address for the NE, using the CLI command:
config interface loopback ip.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
On an 1830 PSS, reprovision the user panel OAMP port IP address for this NE, using the
CLI command: config interface 1/1/oamp ip.
Physically replace the 1830PSS-1 FAN (integrated Fan/User Panel).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reprovision the static routing (gateway) information for this NE, using the CLI
command: config cn routes static add.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To bring the database from a remote server to the NE, enter the CLI command:
config database restore force.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-46
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
In 1830 PSS-4, the Rack lamp control is implemented by using the housekeeping ports
integrated in -48 Vdc Power Filter cards.
Procedure
The following procedure describes the steps to connect a Rack lamp to the Housekeeping
ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the -48 Vdc power filters are properly installed in slot 2 and slot 3
respectively.
Note: The Housekeeping ports are available only on -48 Vdc power filters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The connection between Rack lamp unit of TRU and housekeeping of PSS4 is through a
2500 length cable (PN: 3KC13193AAAA). One end of this cable is terminated with two
RJ-45 connectors and another end is terminated with one male DB9 connector.
Figure 2-24 Cable - Rack lamp connection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Install the two RJ-45 connectors of the rack lamp cable into two housekeeping connectors
of two -48 Vdc Power filter cards respectively. The RJ45A connector is inserted in
housekeeping connector of slot 2 power filter card and RJ45B connector is inserted in
housekeeping connector of slot 3.
Note: The RJ45A and RJ45B connector location sequence cannot exchange and if
multi-shelves are cascaded, this rack lamp cable is only permitted to connect to
housekeeping ports on the main shelf.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-47
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Route the rack lamp cable from the left of the rack to the TRU installed on the rack top or
as determined by location of the connection point in the field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect the male DB9 connector of the rack lamp cable to the female DB9 connector of
rack lamp unit on TRU (P/N: 3DB00734AA**). Refer to the following figure for the
location of the female DB9 connector on TRU. The M1 indicates the jack location for
rack lamp cable.
Figure 2-25 TRU - connectors location
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
TRU illustration
The following figure shows the front view of the TRU.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-48
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-26 TRU front view
Legend:
Red LED to indicate the presence of an URG alarm or CRITICAL alarm
Red LED to indicate the presence of an NURG alarm or MAJOR alarm
Yellow LED to indicate the presence of MEM alarm oor MINOR alarm
Green LED to indicate the presence of service call or service battery
Fuse breaker for rack lamp unit
Note: The BUZZLE LED is not used and kept off for current release.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-49
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Bi-directional Amplifier
Figure 2-27, Bi-directional amplifier (p. 2-50) is an example of bidirectional amplifier:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the opposite direction port of the line driver.

Figure 2-27 Bi-directional amplifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Case of ILA: The Contra-dir is set between the Line ports of the same Line Driver.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Uni-directional Amplifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The contra-dir should be set on the ports facing the Line Fiber.
The opposite port of the Line IN of a Line Driver is the Line OUT of the other LD.
Figure 2-28, Uni-directional amplifier (p. 2-50) is an example of uni-directional
amplifier: set opposite direction port.
Figure 2-28 Uni-directional amplifier
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-50
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Case of End Terminal, Multi degree T/ROADM, ILA:

The Contra-dir is set between the two Line ports of the 2 Line Drivers facing the Line
fiber.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Case of Raman Pump RA2P:

The Contra-dir is set between for the RA2P LINEIN port and Opposite LD LINEOUT
port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Setting Opposite Direction Port
Figure 2-29, Set opposite direction port (p. 2-51) shows how to set opposite direction
port on the Web User Interface.
Figure 2-29 Set opposite direction port
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open: Connections | Physical Topology

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select: {Line Driver}LINE port

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click: External
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Direction: <--> ( bi-dir Line Driver), --> (Uni-Dir Line Driver)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-51
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type: {far end NE loopback IP address shelf/slot/port}of the far end opposite direction
port.
Example: 152.148.66.244 1/2/4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
Figure 2-30 Create external connection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select : Line Driver | LINE (IN or OUT) | Port Details[tab] | Opposite Port Direction
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify the Opposite Direction Port is correct.

Note: If not correct, set the port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-52
Issue 1 June 2013
Replacing a card
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing a card
Slot equipage requirement
Blanks are used to cover unused slots to improve cooling air flow. All slots in the shelf
must be occupied with circuit packs or blanks, and all packs must be fully inserted into
the shelf to maintain proper air flow. The shelf must not have an empty slot. Empty slots
or partially inserted cards decrease the air flow across installed circuit packs and leads to
decrease in their cooling. Circuit packs could potentially be subject to failure as their
temperatures increases.
Replacing a card (general)
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
A card reseat is service affecting if the card is currently carrying services. To discover if
any services are currently carried over a card, perform the procedure Checking for
services on a port in User Provisioning Guide. If there are services currently carried over
the card, it may be best to wait for a maintenance window before reseating the card.
Cooling airflow is critically important for reliable transmission. Every slot in the subrack
requires a circuit pack (card) or circuit pack blank to ensure proper airflow. Do not
remove old cards until new cards are fully prepared for installation. New cards should be
installed within 5 mins of old card removal to maintain proper airflow and cooling for the
other cards within the subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that the replacement card is unpacked and prepared for immediate installation
before starting any other work.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the fan to maximum speed.

CLI
config fan maximum
WEBUI
FAN > Card Properties > Fan Speed > Maximum
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that all of the fibers connected to the card are labeled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remove and cap all of the fibers connected to the card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-53
Issue 1 June 2013
Replacing a card
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that you have an unobstructed extraction path. Tie back any adjacent fibers that are
affected by the card extraction.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unlock the card latch. Place a thumb or finger on the latch release/locking pin located
behind the latch cover and open the latch by lifting and out. This partially unseats the card
from the backplane.
Note: For EC/Power filters, a metal latch is provided on the left; and for SFCs, no
latches are available.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hold the card by the open latch and slide the card out of the slot, being careful not to pull
on any connected fibers on the NE. You will encounter some resistance while the card is
seated on the backplane. Use a gentle pulling force to unseat the card from the backplane.
Slide the card out of the slot. When the card is almost removed, place a hand under the
card to avoid dropping it when it is fully removed from the shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the card in an ESD bag and set it aside nearby so that you can immediately continue
with Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hold replacement card with one hand on the faceplate and the other on bottom of the card
PCB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Align the card PCB with the card guides.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Slide the card along the card guides into the slot. When the card is partially inserted,
grasp the card by the latch, with the latch in the open position.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
Lock the card into place by closing the latches. As the latches close, they push against the
latching tabs on the shelf or cross member, further seating the card. Continue to close the
latches until they are flush with the card faceplate, locking the card in place.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-54
Issue 1 June 2013
Replacing a card
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Set the fan back to normal speed.

CLI
config fan normal
WEBUI
FAN > Card Properties > Fan Speed > Normal
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
Once the port LEDs on the card have lit up, uncap, clean, and reconnect the fibers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
Check the card for alarms:

CLI
alm
Note: If the card software version does not match the NE software version, the card
automatically upgrades to the correct software version. In this case, a software
upgrade alarm is present.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Procedure for getting normal display in Card properties
Note: For Asian users, the WebUI may miss displaying few characters in Card
properties window.
The following procedure is a work around to get a full display in Card properties window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the control panel, select Date, Time, Language, and Regional options.
Result: The Date, Time, Language, and Regional options screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Regional and Language options icon and change system locale to English (United
States).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open Internet Explorer.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In Internet Explorer select Tools > Internet Options > Fonts and select the Language
script as Latin based.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-55
Issue 1 June 2013
Replacing a card
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The above settings are effected and the full display of characters is seen in
Card properties window.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-56
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before you begin
Refer to the following points before starting the 1DPP24M card installation.
1. Refer to the Rack face drawings for the site to determine where the card is required to
be placed.
2. Check whether the Half-slot adapter is installed. If not installed, Refer to Half-slot
adapter installation (p. 2-23) to install the Half-slot adapter.
3. Check the following figures to understand the E1 cable and it pin assignments.
E1 cable description
The following figures show the E1 cable and its pin number descriptions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-57
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-31 E1 cable
Figure 2-32 E1 pin assignment table
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-58
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-33 E1 wire diagram
Procedure
This procedure describes the steps to install a 1DPP24M card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hold the replacement card with one hand on the faceplate and the other on bottom of the
card PCB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-59
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
You may encounter some resistance when the card touches the backplane. Use gentle
force to seat the card on the backplane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
latching tabs on the shelf or a cross member, further seating the card. Continue to close
the latches until they are flush with the card faceplate, locking the card in place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If using two 1DPP24M in the same chassis, the white hook on the cable management
should be removed before connect/fiber connector. Take out the cable/fibers from the
hook. Loosen the two screw on the cable management, and take off the white hook and
two screws. Keep it in a marked plastics bag for future use.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-60
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Plug the E1 cable into the E1/DS1 port of 1DPP24M and secure two screws on cable
connector. Route the cable to the left, ensuring that the cable routing is not too tight. If
there is only one E1 cable used, place it in the upper hook of cable management. If the
cables are too tight to be bent, loosen the two screws on the cable management, and take
off the white hook and the two screws.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert SFPs, as applicable, using shelf-specific documentation from the customer. Slide
the replacement SFP module into the SFP slot. Push the front of the SFP module until you
hear a click sound, indicating the SFP module is securely locked into the SFP slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Inspect and clean the SFP modules after insertion.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Only short/angled boot fiber connector could be used for this card. When short boot fiber
connector used, go to Step 12. For angled boot fiber connector, turn the boot 90 degree
clockwise as shown in the following figure to provide fiber routing enough bent radius.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-61
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Uncap, inspect, clean (as needed), and connect fibers to all required ports with short boot
or angled boot fiber connectors. Also it is recommended to use Scotch tapes to hold fiber
together in an appropriate way.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
Ensure cables/fibers are well routed and not too tight, and close shelf cover carefully if
mounted on EIA/ANSI rack.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-62
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before you begin
Refer to the following points before starting with the 11DPE12, 11DPE12A or 11DPE12E
card installation.
be placed.
2. Check the following figures to understand Timing cable and its pin assignments.
Figure 2-34 11DPE12 card face plate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-63
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-35 11DPE12A card views
Figure 2-36 11DPE12E card face plate
Timing cable description
The following figure shows the Timing cable and its pin number descriptions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-64
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-37 Timing cable wire diagram
Table 2-5
Timing cable wire pin number description
X1
Color
Definition
Remark
Cable
Tip
BITS TX/RX_P
BITS TX/RX
W1
Braid
BITS TX/RX_N
White/Orange
1PPS_N
1PPS_N
W2
Orange
1PPS_P
1PPS_P
White/Green
GND
GND
Green
GND
GND
White/Blue
ToD_N
ToD_N
Blue
ToD_P
ToD_P
Procedure
This procedure describes the steps to install a 11DPE12, 11DPE12A or 11DPE12E card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
card PCB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-65
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-38 PSS4 shelf view
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Plug the Timing cable into the CLK1/CLK2 port of 11DPE12A. Route the cable to the
left, ensuring that the cable routing is not too tight.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert the SFP/XFP module, as applicable, using shelf-specific documentation from the
customer. Slide the replacement SFP/XFP module into the SFP/XFP slot. Push the front
of the SFP/XFP module until you hear a Click sound, indicating the SFP/XFP module
is securely locked into the SFP/XFP slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inspect and clean the SFP/XFP modules after insertion.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-66
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
connector is used go to Step 11. For angled boot fiber connector, turn the boot 90 degree
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
or angled boot fiber connectors. Also it is recommended to use Scotch tapes to hold fiber
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Ensure that the cables/fibers are well routed and not too tight, and close the shelf cover
carefully if mounted on EIA/ANSI rack as shown in the following figure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-67
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before you begin
Before starting the 11QPA4/11QPA4A card installation, refer to the Rack face drawings
for the site to determine where the card is required to be placed.
Figure 2-39 11QPA4 card views
Procedure
This procedure describes the steps to install a 11QPA4/11QPA4A card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
with the next step.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-68
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hold the replacement card with one hand on the faceplate and the other on the bottom of
the card PCB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-40 Lock the card
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert SFP/XFP modules, as applicable, using shelf-specific documentation from the

customer. Slide the replacement SFP/XFP module into the SFP/XFP slot. Push the front
of the SFP/XFP module until you hear a click sound, indicating the SFP/XFP module is
securely locked into the SFP/XFP slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inspect and clean the SFP/XFP modules after insertion.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-69
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
connector is used, go to Step 10. For angled boot fiber connector, turn the boot 90 degree
Figure 2-41 Angled boot fiber connector
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Uncap, inspect, clean (as needed), and connect fibers to all the required ports with short
boot or angled boot fiber connectors. Also it is recommended to use Scotch tapes to hold
fibers together in an appropriate way.
Figure 2-42 Connect fibers to ports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-70
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Four pairs of ports on SFP and XFP need to be linked by jumpers. Refer Figure 2-43,
Ports linked by jumpers (p. 2-71).
Figure 2-43 Ports linked by jumpers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-71
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Ensure cables/fibers are well routed and not too tight, and close the shelf cover carefully
if mounted on EIA/ANSI rack.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-72
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before you begin
Refer to the following points before starting with the 11QPE24 card installation.
1. Remove all the cards installed in slots 7/8/9/10.
2. Check whether the Half-slot adapter is installed. If installed, remove the Half-slot
adapters.
Figure 2-44 11QPE24 card views (1 of 2)
Figure 2-44 11QPE24 card views (2 of 2)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-73
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
This procedure describes the steps to install a 11QPE24 card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hold the 11QPE24 card with one hand on the faceplate and the other on bottom of the
card PCB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Align the card lower PCB with the card guides in slot 7/9. The following Figure shows
the orientation.
Figure 2-45 PSS4 shelf view
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert the XFP/SFP module, as applicable, using shelf-specific documentation from the
customer. Slide the replacement XFP/SFP module into the XFP/SFP slot. Push the front
of the XFP/SFP module until you hear a Click sound, indicating the XFP/SFP module
is securely locked into the XFP/SFP slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inspect and clean the XFP/SFP modules after insertion.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-74
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
or angled boot fiber connectors. Also it is recommended to use Scotch tapes to hold the
fiber together.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
carefully if mounted on EIA/ANSI rack as shown in the following figure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-75
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before you begin
Refer to the following points before starting the 112PDM11 card installation:
Refer to the Rack face drawings for the site to determine where the card is required to
be placed.
Check whether the Half-slot adapter is installed. If installed, remove the Half-slot
adapter.
The CFP module is not an FRU (Field Replaceable Unit); do not attempt to pull the
CFP module out of the pack which can damage the connector for the CFP.
Figure 2-46 112PDM11 Card
Procedure
This procedure describes the steps to install a 112PDM11 card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
with the next step.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-76
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
the card PCB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-47 Card locked in place
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert the SFP module, as applicable, using shelf-specific documentation from the
customer. Slide the replacement SFP module into the SFP slot. Push the front of the SFP
module until you hear a "Click" sound, indicating that the SFP module is securely locked
into the SFP slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-77
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Uncap, inspect, clean (as needed), and connect fibers to all required ports with the short
boot or angled boot fiber connectors. Also, it is recommended to use Scotch tapes to hold
the fibers together in an appropriate way.
Figure 2-49 Fibers connected to ports
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Ensure that the fibers are well routed and not too tight, and close the extended shelf cover
(Part Number: 3KC13331AA) carefully.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-78
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notes:
1. The short shelf cover (3KC12890AA) cannot be used when 112PDM11 is seated in
shelf.
2. If the shelf is mounted on ETSI rack, the door cannot be closed.
Figure 2-50 Shelf cover
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-79
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before you begin
Refer to the following points before starting the 4DPA2/4DPA4 card installation.
be placed.
2. Check whether the Half-slot adapter is installed. If not installed, refer to Half-slot
adapter installation to install the Half-slot adapter.
Figure 2-51 4DPA2 card face plate
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-80
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
This procedure describes the steps to install a 4DPA2/4DPA4 card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
card PCB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
latching tabs on the shelf or cross member, further seating the card. Continue to close the
latches until they are flush with the card faceplate, locking the card in place.
Figure 2-52 Lock the card - 4DPA2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert SFPs, as applicable, using shelf-specific documentation from the customer. Slide
the replacement SFP module into the SFP slot. Push the front of the SFP module until you
hear a click sound, indicating the SFP module is securely locked into the SFP slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-81
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Only short/ angled boot fiber connector could be used for this card. When short boot fiber
connector used, go to Step 10.
For angled boot fiber connector, turn the boot 90 degree clockwise as shown in the figure
below to provide fiber routing enough bent radius.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
or angled boot fiber connectors. Also it is recommended to use Scotch tapes to hold fibers
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Ensure cables/fibers are well routed and not too tight, and close the shelf cover carefully
if mounted on EIA/ANSI rack.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-82
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before you begin
Refer to the following points before starting the 4QPA8 card installation.
Refer to the Rack face drawings for the site to determine where the card is required to
be placed.
Check whether the Half-slot adapter is installed. If installed, remove the Half-slot
adapter.
Figure 2-53 4QPA8 card
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-83
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
This procedure describes the steps to install a 4QPA8 card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
the card PCB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-84
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
module until you hear a "Click" sound, indicating that the SFP module is securely locked
into the SFP slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-85
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Ensure fibers are well routed and not too tight, and close shelf cover carefully if mounted
on EIA/ANSI rack.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-86
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before you begin
Refer to the following points before starting the PTPCTL card installation:
be placed.
2. Check the following figures to understand the E1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable and E1/DS1
2MHz 1PPS ToD cable and their pin assignments.
Figure 2-58 PTPCTL card overview
The following figures show the E1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable and its pin number
descriptions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-87
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-59 E1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable
Table 2-6
E1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable wire diagram
X1
Color
Definition
Remark
Cable
Tip
BITS TX/RX_P
BITS TX/RX
W1
Braid
BITS TX/RX_N
White/Orange
1PPS_N
1PPS_N
W2
Orange
1PPS_P
1PPS_P
White/Green
GND
GND
Green
GND
GND
White/Blue
TOD_N
TOD_N
Blue
TOD_P
TOD_P
E1/DS1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable description
The following figures show the E1/DS1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable and its pin number
descriptions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-88
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-60 E1/DS1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable
Table 2-7
E1/DS1 2 MHz 1PPS ToD cable wire diagram
X1
Color
Definition
Remark
Cable
White/Blue
BITS TX/RX_P
BITS TX/RX
W1
Blue
BITS TX/RX_N
White/Orange
1PPS_N
1PPS_N
W2
Orange
1PPS_P
1PPS_P
White/Green
GND
GND
Green
GND
GND
White/Blue
TOD_N
TOD_N
Blue
TOD_P
TOD_P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-89
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
This procedure describes the steps to install a PTPCTL card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
the card PCB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Plug the E1 2MHz 1PPS ToD or E1/DS1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cables into the CLK1/CLK2
port of PTPCTL. Route the cable to the left, ensuring that the cable routing is not too
tight.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-90
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
module until you hear a "click" sound, indicating that the SFP module is securely locked
into the SFP slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-91
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Ensure cables/fibers are well routed and not too tight, and close shelf cover carefully if
mounted on EIA/ANSI rack.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-92
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before you begin
Refer to the following points before starting the PTPIO card installation:
be placed.
2. Check the following figures to understand the LC adaptors and their assignments.
Figure 2-65 LC adaptors
LC interface description on front plate
The following figure shows the LC interface assignments:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-93
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-66 LC interface assignments
Procedure
This procedure describes the steps to install a PTPIO card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
with the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
the card PCB.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-94
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-95
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
carefully if mounted on EIA/ANSI rack.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-96
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure
Complete the following steps to install Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 SPD shelf in an ANSI
equipment rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Determine the mounting location, the PSS-4 SPD shelf should be mounted under the
PSS-4 shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For 19 inch ANSI rack, attach 19 inch ANSI rack mounting ears 3KC13294AAAA to
each side of the 1830 PSS-4 SPD shelf, using three M3 screws (1AD009040012) per side.
See the following figure:
Figure 2-71 SPD installation for a 19 inch ANSI rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-97
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For 23 inch ANSI rack, attach 23 inch ANSI rack mounting ears 3KC13295AAAA to
each side of the 1830 PSS-4 SPD shelf, using three M3 screws (1AD009040012) per side.
See the following figure:
Figure 2-72 SPD installation for a 23 inch ANSI rack
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mount the 1830 PSS-4 SPD shelf in an ANSI rack, using two 12-24 screws
(1AD139920001) per side.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
applications.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
be 14 AWG (2.0 mm cross-section) at a minimum and have a FCI/Burndy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-98
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cable to the rear of the chassis.
Figure 2-73 Bay frame
Bay frame is properly prepared for grounding by removing all paint coatings, exposing
bare metal at ground lug attachment point. Bare and coated with anti-oxidant prior to
attaching ground lug.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect one end of the customer-provided copper ground cable to bay frame using only
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that the AC filter is properly installed in PSS-4 Slot2/Slot3.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-99
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unpack the cable CA-AC Power Supply 3KC05127AXAA (X is variant for cable type, it
depends on type of installation kits) and AC CABLE ADAPTOR 3KC13016AA from
installation kit.
Figure 2-74 Power supply cable
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Ensure no sides of these two items are connecting either power supply or AC filter cards.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Plug the outlet of the cable CA-AC Power supply 3KC05127AXAA into the input
connector of the SPD shelf unit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Plug one end of the AC CABLE ADAPTOR 3KC13016AA into the output connector of
the SPD shelf unit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-100
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
Plug the connector of the AC CABLE ADAPTOR into the power input port of the AC
filter and ensure that the connection is reliable as shown in the following figure:
Figure 2-75 Plugging the connector
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-101
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Use cable tie1AD000100022 to tie the cable to the handle of the SPD unit.
Figure 2-76 Cable tie
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
The left SPD unit connects to the left AC filter, and the right SPD unit connects to the
right AC filter.
Figure 2-77 SPD unit connects to the AC filter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-102
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
Route the cable and secure towards AC power supply. Place the plug of the cable CA-AC
Power Supply near the outlet of the AC power supply. Do not plug it into the AC power
outlet before following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
Ensure that the cable routing near AC filter is not too tight.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
Ensure that the switch of the AC filter is in OFF status. If not, use 0# screw driver to
turn it off as shown in the following figure:
Figure 2-78 AC filter switch - OFF status
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
Verify that the designated AC power source outlet is surge protected. Refer to the Power
filters (p. 2-202) for the AC power source specification. Refer the site engineering
specification for any additional site specific AC requirements. Connect the other end of
the cable CA-AC Power Supply to the outlet of AC power supply.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-103
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
Turn the switch of the AC filter ON with 0# screw driver as shown in the following
figure:
Figure 2-79 AC filter switch - ON status
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-104
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before you begin
Mounting kits are available with the hardware needed to install Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-4 in a standard EIA, ANSI, or ETSI equipment rack. For details and ordering
information, see 1830 PSS-4 installation kits in Product Information and Planning Guide.
Note: There are two front covers for 1830 PSS-4 shelf, the standard cover is:
3KC12890AAAC, the extended cover is: 3KC13331AAAA. When 112PDM11 pack
is used in 1830 PSS-4 shelf, the extended cover should be ordered; the procedure of
installation is the same as that of the standard cover shown below.
Procedure for shelf cover installation
Complete the following steps to install the shelf cover.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure all cables including power chords, fibers, and cables are well connected and
routed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hook the shelf cover as shown in the following figure so as to include all the cables.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-105
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the two bottom pillars of shelf cover into the bottom hooks of shelf, and ensure that
no fibers from the left of shelf cover are in the way.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Place the shelf cover in position and ensure that no cables or fibers are in the way. Secure
the captive screw on the right side.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Secure the captive screw in the left side with one #1 Philips screw driver with 200 mm
shank or longer. Ensure no cables or fibers are in the way.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Procedure for removing shelf cover

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loosen the captive screw on the right with thumb or #1 Philips screw driver with 200 mm
shank or longer.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-106
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Similarly, loosen the captive screw on the left side. Ensure that no cables or fibers from
the left of shelf cover are in the way.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Take the shelf cover off from the shelf by tilting the top portion towards the front as
shown in the following figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the bottom pillars of the shelf cover from the bottom hooks.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-107
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-108
Issue 1 June 2013
3an and air filter

F
installation
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides instructions for installation and replacement of the fan and air filter.
Contents
Fan installation and replacement
3-2
Fan air filter replacement
3-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-1
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fan installation and replacement procedure
CAUTION
Possibility of personal injury.
Personal injury can result from contact with moving fan blades.
Avoid contact with rotating fans. Personal injury can be caused by rotating fans.
The following procedure describes how to replace the fan module of the 1830 PSS-4. To
install a fan module in an empty shelf, only perform steps 3 and 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Completely loosen the fan module retaining screw.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-2
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Grasp the handle of the fan module and pull it straight out of the 1830 PSS-4 unit.
Figure 3-1 1830 PSS-4 fan module
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To install the new or replacement fan module align it with the opening in the 1830 PSS-4
unit, and slide it straight into the unit until it seats with the internal power connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Completely tighten the retaining screw, but do not overtighten.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-3
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

NOTICE
Equipment damage
Potential equipment damage
Before installing or removing the filter, check that the protective adhesive film has been
removed.
Fan air filter replacement procedure
CAUTION
Possibility of personal injury.
Personal injury can result from contact with moving fan blades.
Avoid contact with rotating fans. Personal injury can be caused by rotating fans.
CAUTION
Contamination possible
Contamination can be drawn into the unit when the fan filter is removed.
To prevent the possibility of contamination being drawn into the unit when the fan filter is
removed fans must be temporarily shut down before the replacement of the filter. It is
important that the new fan filter is installed and the fans restarted within 120 secs to
prevent overheating of circuit components.
Air filters on Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 units should be replaced at 3-month intervals or
sooner if necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the subrack cover.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Completely loosen the air filter cover retaining screw and remove cover.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-4
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Grasp the end of the air filter and pull it straight out of the 1830 PSS-4 unit as shown in
Figure 3-2 Air filter removal
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Align the new air filter with the opening in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 unit, and slide
it straight into the unit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Install the cover and completely tighten the retaining screw, but do not overtighten.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-5
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-6
Issue 1 June 2013

4
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes how to provision an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service

Switch-4 (PSS-4) network element (NE).
Contents
Required materials
4-2
Preconditioning
4-6
4-7
Connect to the NE for CLI access
4-12
Configure the software environment and load, and commit the software
4-14
Set the NE to operate in SDH mode
4-23
4-24
4-26
Configure GNE for management system access
4-31
Set the network element date and time
4-38
Disable the ES port monitoring
4-44
Firmware Update
4-47
4-49
4-49
Configure additional system properties
4-55
Example configuration of FTP server
4-57
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-1
Issue 1 June 2013
Required materials
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required materials
Overview
This section provides procedures to download and activate Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4
software on a new NE.
Service disruption caution
These procedures should be completed on a new NE only. Existing provisioning on the

NE including any traffic is lost.
Required materials
The following items are required:
Personal computer (PC) running Windows 2000 or XP

The following software is loaded on the PC.
Internet Explorer version 6 or greater
SUN Java Runtime Environment version 5 or greater
Telnet application
FTP server software
10/100 BaseT LAN card
Shielded RJ45 CIT cable
New CIT cable

ESD wrist strap
Shielded RJ45 straight-through cable
Note: It is important that the RJ45 cable be shielded. Unshielded RJ45 cables do not
provide adequate protection to the system hardware.
Table 4-1
CIT cable pin assignments
X1
X2
Color
white/green
white/orange
white/blue
white/brown
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-2
Issue 1 June 2013
Required materials
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-1 CIT cable
Figure 4-2 New CIT cable
Legend:
X1
RJ45 to connect to EC CIT port
X2
RJ45 to connect PC LAN port for CIT
X3
DB9 connector to connect PC series port for debugging
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-3
Issue 1 June 2013
Required materials
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-3 New CIT cable
Release change notices
Review the Customer Release Notes for information about changes in the most recent
release.
Precautions and recommendations
Ensure that you read and understand the following:
Read the entire software installation procedure before beginning.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-4
Issue 1 June 2013
Required materials
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If installing or upgrading to software associated with a new release, read and follow
the instructions in the Customer Release Notes for that release.
The person performing the software installation must be trained and have an
understanding of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 system.
Perform the software installation procedure in the sequence provided; any deviation
may lead to unpredictable Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 behavior.
Use care when handling circuit packs.
Use ESD wrist straps and static-safe bags.
Note: Graphics and screen illustrations utilized in this section may not contain current
release designations. They are for reference only.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-5
Issue 1 June 2013
Preconditioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Preconditioning
Purpose
The following procedure helps to ensure that the NE has been installed properly and is
ready for software installation.
Procedure
If this is a multi-shelf system, the following steps should be performed on each of the
shelves. At this time, the shelf ID setting on all shelves should be 1 (Master). Also, the
intershelf cables should remain disconnected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the shelf ID setting on all shelves is 1 (Master), and that the inter-shelf cables
are disconnected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to the site documentation and verify that all modules are present and slotted
correctly. Verify that the fibers are properly connected between packs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check all power and electrical cabling to be sure that it is connected properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the shelf is powered up, the green LED is lit on both power filter modules, and
the fans are running.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Seat all circuit packs and modules except for Optical Transponder (OT) or Line Driver
(LD) circuit packs. OT and LD circuit packs should be inserted after the software has
been activated and committed.
Note: When installing the EC circuit pack, ensure that the screws on the faceplate are
fastened to facilitate the installation of circuit packs below the EC.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-6
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
You can connect directly to the network element (NE) to access the web interface
(WebUI). No client software is needed on your PC, only Internet Explorer.
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 is shipped with software and a factory image. This procedure
provides the first steps for establishing connection to the NE using WebUI and creating an
initial database.
Procedure
Note: SUN Java Runtime Environment must be installed on the PC.

Note: Popup blockers must be turned off in Internet Explorer.
Note: The network element is equipped with a DHCP server. Your LAN port must be
configured to obtain an IP address automatically.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect one end of the CIT cable to the CIT port on the EC of the master shelf. Connect
the other end of the CIT cable to the Ethernet port on your PC.
Note: All shelves in a multi-shelf system should be set as master.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open a PC command window and type ipconfig and <Enter>. Verify that the IP
address assigned by the NE to your PC is 172.16.0.x. See Figure 4-4, PC command
window (p. 4-7).
Figure 4-4 PC command window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Launch Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the CIT port in the Address bar. The
default address for an uncommissioned NE is 172.16.0.1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-7
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Go.
Result: The browser connects to the network element and the WebUI login window is
displayed.
Figure 4-5 Login Screen
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter admin in the User: field and admin in the Password: field. Then click Login.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
A warning message appears. If there is no warning message, go to Step 11.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-8
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the warning is similar to Figure 4-6, WebUI invalid database warning (p. 4-9), click
Initialize at the bottom and then continue to Step 10.
Figure 4-6 WebUI invalid database warning
If the warning only shows the DBINVALID alarm without Initialize option, then
continue to Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open a CLI session using the procedure Connect to the NE for CLI access (p. 4-12).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Clear the database by typing config database clear command and <Enter>. Type
Yes and <Enter>, when prompted at the warning message.
The sample output is as shown in the following:
WARNING: This is service affecting.
After the database has been erased
the system will automatically restart.
Are you sure you want to erase the database (yes, no)? yes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-9
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
The system will restart on its own after initialization.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
The system prompts you for a new NE name as shown in Figure 4-7, WebUI NE name
prompt (p. 4-10). Type the NE name provided in the site documentation.
Figure 4-7 WebUI NE name prompt
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Click Submit and the system restarts.

Result: The restart takes about 2-15 mins. A window appears showing the restart
progress as shown in Figure 4-8, WebUI NE restart progress window (p. 4-10).
Figure 4-8 WebUI NE restart progress window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
After restart is complete, log back in to the webUI interface and the system properties
view is opened.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-10
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Check if a No committed software load alarm exists. If the alarm is present,

continue to Step 15. If the alarm is not present, go to Step 18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
In the WebUI, select Administration -> Software -> Upgrade.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
Select Commit for the Action Type and click Apply.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
Click Refresh and verify the command completed and the Committed Release is
populated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
If there are additional shelves in the system, repeat Step 1 through Step 13 for each shelf
in the system.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-11
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
You can connect directly to the network element to access the CLI. No client software is
needed on your PC, only a telnet application. The remaining procedures in this chapter
are completed using CLI.
Procedure
You can connect a computer (typically a laptop) directly to a network element to access
the CLI using the CIT port on the EC. On multi-shelf network elements, the CIT port is
active on the master shelf only. Note this is the same connection used for the webUI
interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If not already connected, connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the CIT port on the EC.
Connect the other end of the cable to the Ethernet port on your PC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use a Telnet application on your PC and open a Telnet session connected to the IP address
of the CIT port.
The default address for an uncommissioned NE is 172.16.0.1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Press <Enter> and the login: prompt appears. Type cli and <Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type cli at the Password: prompt and Enter.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
This starts the CLI interface, and another Username: prompt appears. Type admin and
Enter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
At the Password: prompt, type admin and <Enter>. This brings up the following
warning notice.
1830 PSS-4, WAVELENGTH TRACKER
Alcatel-Lucent
(c) 2008 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Welcome to the CLI
Warning Notice
This system is restricted solely to Alcatel-Lucent authorized
users for legitimate business purposes only. The actual or
attempted unauthorized access, use, or modification of this system
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-12
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
is strictly prohibited by Alcatel-Lucent. Unauthorized users are

subject to Company disciplinary proceedings and/or criminal and
civil penalties under state, federal, or other applicable domestic
and foreign laws. Use of this system may be monitored and
recorded for administrative and security reasons. Anyone accessing
this system expressly consents to such monitoring and is advised
that if monitoring reveals possible evidence of criminal activity,
Alcatel-Lucent may provide the evidence of such activity to law
enforcement officials. All users must comply with Alcatel-Lucent
Corporate Instructions regarding the protection of Alcatel-Lucent
information assets.
Do you acknowledge? (Y/N)?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type Y and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The current alarm summary is displayed followed by the NE# prompt. CLI commands
can now be entered. Type ? for a list of commands.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-13
Issue 1 June 2013
Configure the software environment and load, and commit

the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

the software
Purpose
The NE is shipped with software pre-loaded. However, the software version that is
pre-loaded on the cards may not be the same as the software version that is run in the
network. Perform the following tasks to load and commit the correct software load on the
NE.
The PC connected to the NE must have an FTP server running. The first step is to prepare
the FTP server on the NE. Then follow the CLI procedure for software download and
activation.
Note: Software download is only supported through the OAMP port. Starting from
Release 5.0 software download is supported through the CIT port. (See Configure the
OAMP Ethernet Port in User Provisioning Guide for connection details. Connection
of a CIT port on a slave shelf to an external LAN is forbidden.)
Note: In multi-shelf installations, the slave EC and Master NE must be installed and
committed with same software load.
OAMP port configuration
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Login to CLI. See the procedure in Connect to the NE for CLI access (p. 4-12).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config interface 1/1/oamp ip <address>/<mask> and <Enter>.

Where <address> is the IP address and <mask> represents the subnet mask following
the CIDR format. Obtain this information from the site documentation.
Note: The port must be enabled for this command to take effect. To enable the port,
type config interface ec 1/1/oamp state up and <Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Change the TCP/IP properties on the PC from Obtain an IP address automatically

(DHCP) to a static IP address within the same subnet as the address provisioned in Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect the CIT cable from the EC CIT port and the PC. Connect a straight-through
Ethernet cable to the OAMP port and the other end of the cable to the Ethernet port on the
PC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-14
Issue 1 June 2013

the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Login to CLI, but this time Telnet to the IP address provisioned for the OAMP port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
FTP server preparation
Note: Refer to Example configuration of FTP server (p. 4-57) for more detailed
instructions on configuring an FTP server.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Start the FTP server application on your PC and create a user account. Record the User ID
and password established for the account.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Establish a root directory for the server and ensure that it has read and write privileges.
You can create a folder in the root directory that contains the NE software.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Copy the folder and subfolders with the NE software into the FTP root directory
established as in Step 2.
Note: The software folder name has the format 1830PSS4-<ver>, where <ver> is the
version of software to be loaded. There should also be two subfolders named
1830PSS4 and 1830PSS4M. The software typically is provided on a CD.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-15
Issue 1 June 2013

the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PC preparation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open Windows Firewall from the Control Panel. See Figure 4-9, Windows Firewall
settings (p. 4-16).
Figure 4-9 Windows Firewall settings
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Off. Then click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open a PC command window and type ipconfig and <Enter>. Note the IP address
assigned by the NE to your PC. This is used later in the procedure. See Figure 4-4, PC
command window (p. 4-7).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-16
Issue 1 June 2013

the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config software server ip <ip> and <Enter>.

Where <ip> is the IP address of the PC with the FTP server. This is the IP address you
obtained when using the ipconfig command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config software server userid <userid> and <Enter>.

Where <userid> is the user id of the user account defined on the FTP server.
Sample output is as shown in the following:
Enter password:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type <pw> and <Enter>.

Where <pw> is the password for user account defined on the FTP server.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config software server root <path> and <Enter>.

Where <path> is the path to the NE software relative to the server root directory.
Note: If the software folder was copied directly into the root directory, enter / for the
<path>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config software server detail and <Enter>.

Sample output is shown in the following:
Software
Software
Software
Software
Server
Server
Server
Server
Protocol
IP
Userid
Root Directory
:
:
:
:
FTP
172.16.0.2
sw1
/
Verify that the settings are correct.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config software upgrade status and <Enter>.

Sample output is shown in the following:
Software Upgrade Information:
Software Server IP
Software Server Root Directory
Committed Release
Working Release Directory
: 172.16.0.2
: /
:
:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-17
Issue 1 June 2013

the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Working Release
: 1830PSS4-0.00-2
Active Release
: 1830PSS41-0.00-2/
Operation
:
Operation Status
:
Upgrade Path Available
: True
Software Download Script (Timezone: ):
Verify that the current active software is an older release than the software that you are
loading.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config software upgrade manual audit <releasedir> nobackup and

<Enter>.
Where <releasedir> is the directory name on the PC containing the software.
This checks the path and verifies that the system is ready for upgrade.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: A listing of packs is displayed along with the status showing which packs
need to be upgraded. Sample output is shown in the following:
Software Upgrade Information:
Software Server IP
: 192.168.0.241
Software Server Root Directory
: /SVT/
Committed Release
: 1830PSS4-4.8-50
Working Release Directory
:
Working Release
: 1830PSS4-4.8-50
Active Release
: 1830PSS4-4.8-50
Operation
: Audit
Operation Status
: Completed
Upgrade Path Available
: True
Software Download Script (Timezone: ):
Stage=0 Step=1
SH/SL: 1/1
CARDTYPE: EC
ACTION: Audit node
Completed
100% complete
RESULT: Success
Stage=1 Step=0
SH/SL: 0/0
CARDTYPE: Empty
ACTION: Transfer to disk
Planned
0% complete
RESULT: None
Stage=2 Step=0
SH/SL: 1/1
CARDTYPE: EC
ACTION: Activate
Planned
0% complete
RESULT: None
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat Step 8 until the Operation Status indicates Completed. Verify the Upgrade Path
Available changes to True.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-18
Issue 1 June 2013

the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Type config software upgrade manual load and <Enter>.

Result: This transfers the software to the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11

Watch for the following lines.
...
Operation
Operation Status
...
: Load
: In Progress 0%
Continue to execute the status command until the Operation Status shows Completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Type config software upgrade manual activate and <Enter>.

Result: This activates the software on the 1830 PSS-4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
The NE reboots and the Telnet connection drops. Wait for about 30 mins after the fan
speed drops back down to normal speed and login to the NE. (This is applicable for pre
3.6.0 releases).
Wait for 1 min after EC LED stops blinking green and log back in to the NE. (This is
applicable for 3.6.0 and later)
Refer to Connect to the NE for CLI access (p. 4-12).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14

...
Operation
Operation Status
...
: Activate
: In Progress 0%
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
The NE may have a DBINVALID alarm. If the alarm is not present, go to Step 18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
Clear the database by typing config database clear and <Enter>. Type yes and
<Enter> when prompted at the warning message.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-19
Issue 1 June 2013

the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example: Sample output is as shown in the following:

WARNING: This is service affecting.
After the database has been erased
the system will automatically restart.
Are you sure you want to erase the database (yes, no)? yes
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
The system will automatically restart after initialization. Log in to the CLI after the restart
is complete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
Type config software upgrade commit and <Enter>.

Result: This commits the software to be the primary release.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19

...
Operation
Operation Status
.
: Commit
: In Progress 0%
Continue to execute the status command until the Operations Status shows Completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
After the last status command is executed, verify that the new software release is
displayed as the committed, working, and active release.
See the following sample output:
Software Server IP : 172.16.0.2
Software Server Root Directory : /
Committed Release : 1830PSS4-6.0-0
Working Release Directory : 1830PSS4-6.0-0/
Working Release : 1830PSS4-6.0-0
Active Release : 1830PSS4-6.0-0
Operation : Commit
Operation Status : Completed
Upgrade Path Available : True
Software Download Script(Timezone: ):
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21
Insert OT and LD circuit packs at this time. Insert one at a time allowing each circuit pack
to boot before inserting the next.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-20
Issue 1 June 2013

the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22
If this is a multi-shelf system, repeat from Step 1 of OAMP port configuration

(p. 4-14), through Step 21 for each shelf in the system.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Connect to peer shelves

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If this is a multi-shelf system, perform the following steps to connect each of the peer
shelves to the master. If there is only a single master shelf, skip to Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect the PC to the master shelf with the CIT cable and login to CLI following
Connect to the NE for CLI access (p. 4-12).
Note: Do not connect either the CIT port or the OAMP port of the peer shelf to a
LAN.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power down the next peer shelf to be added and set the shelf ID according the settings
shown in Table 4-2, Shelf ID and settings (p. 4-21). Ensure that there is no duplicate
shelf ID on peer shelf. Connecting shelves with duplicate shelf ID will cause the NE to
continuously reboot.
Table 4-2
Shelf ID and settings
Shelf
Shelf ID setting
Master
Peer shelf 1
Peer shelf 2
Peer shelf 3
Peer shelf 4
Peer shelf 5
Peer shelf 6
Peer shelf 7
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power up the shelf again.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-21
Issue 1 June 2013

the software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect the ES1 port of the peer shelf to the ES2 port of the previous shelf in the system
using a cross-over cable.
Note: Never configure the system in a closed ring topology (a cable connected
from the last shelf back to the master shelf). This can cause a broadcast storm
leading to system instability.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wait for 10 mins and type sh shelf * and <Enter>. Verify the new shelf shows in the
inventory.
Note: If new shelf information cannot be retrieved or master shelf starts to reboot,
check the shelfID and cross-over cable of the new shelf .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type alm and <Enter>. Verify that there are no unexpected alarms.
Note: There can be link down alarms on unconnected ES1/ES2 ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If there are additional peer shelves to be added go to Step 3.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The system is now ready for provisioning.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-22
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Background
The network element defaults to SONET mode. Perform this procedure only if you want
the network element to operate in SDH mode.
Note: This procedure should only be executed when a system is first turned up.
Procedure
If you want the network element to operate in SONET mode, skip to Set the loopback IP
address (p. 4-24).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type show version and <Enter>.

Sample output:
Software Version: 1830PSS4-6.0
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Copy the string after Software Version: This is used as the password for the SDH mode
command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config admin mode sdh <pw> and <Enter>.

Where <pw> is the password copied in the previous step.
Result: The following Warning message appears.
WARNING: Changing the SONET/SDH mode will cause the database
to be cleared, the node to be cold reset and all services to
be deleted. Enter 'yes' to confirm, 'no' to cancel:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type yes and <Enter>.

Result: You are logged out. The procedure is complete.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-23
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Each network element (NE) requires a loopback address for IP connectivity. The default
loopback IP address for a new NE is 172.16.1.1/32.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If using the CLI, continue to Procedure - CLI (p. 4-24).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If using the WebUI, continue to Procedure - WebUI (p. 4-24).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Procedure - CLI
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config interface loopback ip <address>/32 and <Enter>.

Where <address> is the IP address. Obtain this information from the site documentation.
Result: The following warning message appears.
WARNING: Changing the loopback IP address will result
in a warm reset of this network element.
Enter 'yes' to confirm, 'no' to cancel:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The CLI session is terminated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the CLI login procedure described in Connect to the NE for CLI access
(p. 4-12).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Procedure - WebUI
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, click System on the left pane.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-24
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The System Properties screen is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the loopback IP address in Loopback IP: box.

Note: The default loopback IP address for a new NE is 172.16.1.1/32.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the loopback Subnet mask in Loopback Subnet Mask: box.

Note: The default loopback subnet mask is 255.255.255.255
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the SNMP source as Loopback IP only from the list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Submit.
Note: If the Loopback IP, Loopback Subnet Mask and/or SNMP Source is changed,
the WebUI displays the following warning message. The user will be allowed to
continue with the modify request or cancel. Upon continuing with the request, the
WebUI will send the modify request to the NE and logout the user.
Result: The WebUI displays the following warning message.
Warning: You are about to change the Loopback IP, Subnet Mask and/or
SNMP Source. This will cause a warm reboot of the Network Element
and all
users will be logged off. Continue?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Yes to continue.

Result: The session is terminated and the user is logged out.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-25
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Loopback IP address
Follow these steps to configure the loopback IP address.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select System and then Details tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the Loopback IP address (customer provided) and Loopback Subnet Mask
(255.255.255.255).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Submit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK at the Warning. The system will reboot (around 2 minutes.)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Log back in to the WebUI when the system is back up.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
GNE OAMP IP address
If the NE will act as a Gateway Network Element (GNE) then the OAMP port must be
provisioned and activated using the following procedure.
Note: Verify that the GNE is disconnected from the customer OSS LAN to ensure that the
customer does not log in to the NE during turn-up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the equipment tree expand Shelf 1 | EC | OAMP and select the Port Details tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the OAMP IP address and subnet mask.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check Port Enabled.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Submit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-26
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
If the customer is using...
Then ...
Static Routes for GNE OAMP connection
Proceed with Step 6.
OSPF Routing for GNE OAMP connection
Proceed to OSPF routing configuration

(p. 4-28).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create a static route to the Default Gateway.

Select Administration | Networking | IP Routes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Create.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check the Default Route box:

Figure 4-10 Default route box
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Next Hop address enter the default gateway IP address provided by the customer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Check the Redistribute box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Click Apply. The default route is created:

Figure 4-11 Default route
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-27
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
OSPF routing configuration
Use this procedure to configure the OSPF routing only if the customer is using OSPF, and
not static routes, to manage the data communication network. Refer GNE OAMP IP
address (p. 4-26).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the equipment tree expand Shelf 1 | EC | OAMP port and select the OSPF Details
tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the OSPF Routing to Enable. Click Submit.

Verify from customer DCN information that the DCN is using OSPF area 0.
Note: If the customer is not using OSPF area 0, then the required area must be
created. See Steps 4-7.
Figure 4-12 OSPF settings
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refresh this screen until the OSPF Adjacency State is Full.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you need to create an OSPF Area other than default Area 0, in the equipment tree view
select Administration | Networking | OSPF Areas.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-28
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Create.
Figure 4-13 Create OSPF Area
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Define the OSPF Area.

Define the Area Type attributes.
Stub - A stub area is an area which does not receive route advertisements external to the
autonomous system (AS) and routing from within the area is based entirely on a default
route.
Nonstub is normal OSPF operation (that is, 1.1.1.254).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply, then Close.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the equipment tree view select Administration | Networking | OSPF Areas. Verify
that new OSPF Area is created:
Figure 4-14 New OSPF area created
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-29
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-30
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Background
The NE, if configured as a Gateway Network Element (GNE), can connect to an Element
Management System (EMS) through the OAMP port. The IP address must be provisioned
and the OAMP port enabled to use this port. In addition, an IP route must be established
to route connections to the RNEs.
Purpose
Use this procedure to provision and enable the OAMP port, so that the NE can act as a
Gateway Network Element. The procedure also provisions the IP route information to
allow connection to RNEs. Not all NEs (that is, RNEs) require this provisioning. Refer to
the site documentation.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If using WebUI, continue to WebUI Procedure (p. 4-31).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If using CLI, continue to CLI procedure (p. 4-36).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
WebUI Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand Shelf 1 in the equipment tree and then expand Slot 1: EC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select OAMP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-31
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Port Interface Settings window appears as shown in Figure 4-15,
WebUI OAMP port provisioning (p. 4-32).

Figure 4-15 WebUI OAMP port provisioning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the IP address and subnet mask as indicated in the site documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check the Port Enabled check-box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Submit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-32
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Administration -> Networking -> IP Routes from the top menu as shown in
Figure 4-16, WebUI IP routes menu (p. 4-33).
Figure 4-16 WebUI IP routes menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-33
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The IP Routes window is displayed as shown in Figure 4-17, WebUI IP
routes window (p. 4-34).

Figure 4-17 WebUI IP routes window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Create.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-34
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Create IP Routes window is displayed as shown in Figure 4-18, WebUI
Create IP route window (p. 4-35).

Figure 4-18 WebUI Create IP route window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter IP address of the destination host or network in Destination IP: field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter IP subnet mask of the route in Mask: field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Enter IP address of the next interface in the route, also known as the gateway address in
Next Hop: field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Enter the distance between the hops in the Distance: field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Click Apply.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-35
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
Verify that the new IP route is now shown in the IP routes window as shown in Figure
4-19, WebUI IP routes window with new route (p. 4-36).
Figure 4-19 WebUI IP routes window with new route
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
CLI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure the OAMP Ethernet port. (Also see, Configure the OAMP Ethernet port in
User Provisioning Guide.
Type config interface ec 1/1/oamp ip <address>/<mask> and <Enter>.
Where <address> is the IP address and <mask> represents the subnet mask following the
CIDR format. Obtain this information from the site documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config interface ec 1/1/oamp state up and Enter, to set the state of the
interface to up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config interface ec 1/1/oamp routestate enabled and <Enter>, to

enable routing on the interface.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-36
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config cn routes static add <destination IP address>/<mask>

and <Enter>, to create static IP route.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-37
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to set the network element (NE) date and time manually, by using the
network element internal clock, or by synchronizing the network element with a network
time protocol (NTP) server. The following procedure performs the initial setting
manually.
Manual procedure to set NE date and time
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If using the WebUI, continue to WebUI procedure (p. 4-38).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If using the CLI, continue to CLI procedure (p. 4-39).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
WebUI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Administration > Date and Time as shown in the following figure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-38
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Date and Time Administration screen appears as shown in the following
figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the current date, time, and time zone settings and click Apply.
Note: All current WebUI users are logged off.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
CLI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config general date <date> and <Enter>.

Where <date> is of the format yyyy mm dd
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config general time <time> and <Enter>.

Where <time> is of the format hh mm ss, and hh is between 0 and 23, mm is between 0
and 59, and ss is between 0 and 59.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
NTP configuration procedure
Use this procedure to configure each network element to use up to three NTP servers,
indexed by number. The network element automatically selects the highest stratum NTP
server with which it can reliably communicate. If the network element loses
communications with and NTP server, it automatically selects the next best available
server.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-39
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If using the WebUI, continue to NTP WebUI procedure (p. 4-40).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If using the CLI, continue to NTP CLI procedure (p. 4-42).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
NTP WebUI procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select Administration > NTP > Servers.

Result: The NTP Servers screen is displayed as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-20 NTP Servers screen
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Create to add an NTP server.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-40
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Create NTP Server screen is displayed.

Figure 4-21 Create NTP Server screen
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the Server IP and click Apply to submit the changes.

Result: A new NTP server is created.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To activate the new NTP server, select Administration > NTP > Properties.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-41
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Network Time Protocol Properties screen is displayed as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 4-22 Network Time Protocol Properties screen
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the NTP Enabled: and click Apply. Wait for a minute and then the NE can be
synchronized with the NTP server.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
NTP CLI procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config general ntp add <index> <IP_address> and <Enter>.

Where <index> is the index number of the server and <IP_address> is the IP address of
the server.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config general ntp status enable.

Reference: Use this command to activate the NTP server.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type show general ntp details.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-42
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference: Use this command to view the NTP details.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-43
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure
Use this procedure to disable the ES port monitoring on the EC card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If using the WebUI, continue to WebUI procedure (p. 4-44).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If using the CLI, continue to CLI procedure (p. 4-46).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
WebUI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Expand Shelf 1 in the equipment tree and then expand each of the EC packs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select an ES port (ES1 or ES2).

Result: The ES port provisioning window appears as shown in the following figure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-44
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
A Link down alarm is raised against the ES port when it is enabled. (See the following
figure)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Clear the Port Enabled check-box and click Submit. (See the following figure)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The link down alarm on ES port is cleared.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-45
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type show interface ec 1/1/ES1 or show interface ec 1/1/es2 and

<Enter>.
Verify the ES1 or ES2 port admin and link integrity state. The port admin default state is
UP. The Link Integrity state is down unless a LAN cable is connected to an extension
shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type alm and <Enter>.

Verify that there is a link down alarm on ES1 or ES2 unless a LAN cable is connected to
an extension shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config interface ec 1/1/es1 state down or

config interface ec 1/1/es2 state down and <Enter>.
Disable the ES1 or ES2 Port Monitoring.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type alm and <Enter>.

Verify that the link down alarm is cleared on ES1 or ES2 unless a LAN cable is connected
to an extension shelf.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-46
Issue 1 June 2013
Firmware Update
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Firmware Update
Introduction
Firmware update can be done in two manners:
Perform a cold reboot of the NE, which will automatically update the firmware on all
cards connected. See Automatic Firmware Update (p. 4-47)below.
Perform a cold reboot the OT card, which need firmware update.
Choose the firmware profile required. See Manually Select Firmware Profile
(p. 4-47) and Automatic Firmware Update (p. 4-47).
Automatic Firmware Update
Follow these steps to initiate a cold reboot of the NE to update the firmware on all cards.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI select System | Reboot | Cold Reboot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Submit, then OK.

Note: The NE will reboot. The reboot will take several minutes depending on the
number of cards requiring a firmware upgrade.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Manually Select Firmware Profile
Follow the steps below to check and select the firmware profiles of the cards.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI select Reports | firmware.

Figure 4-23 Firmware
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify the firmware profiles assigned to the cards.

Perform the remaining steps for each card that needs its firmware modified.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-47
Issue 1 June 2013
Firmware Update
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the card in the equipment tree.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Firmware tab, then Provision release.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the requested firmware profile.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Submit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-48
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
This procedure ensures that the latest firmware is uploaded to all the installed circuit
packs. This is done by performing a cold reboot on the NE.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config admin resetNE cold and <Enter>.

Result: The following Warning message appears.
WARNING: You are about to perform a cold system restart.
This is a service affecting command.
Enter 'yes' to confirm, 'no' to cancel:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Result: The NE reboots. The reboot takes several minutes, depending on the number
of circuit packs requiring a firmware upgrade.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type show firmware upgrade.

Result: The firmware upgrade starts.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type show firmware NE

Result: The firmware status (Loaded or none) is shown for each card.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Recommended Handling (Older Style)
Figure 4-24, Circuit pack handling - Example 1 (p. 4-50) and Figure 4-25, Circuit
pack handling - Example 2 (p. 4-50) are the older styles of OAs/LDs, without protective
shield covering the printed circuit board.
Figure 4-24, Circuit pack handling - Example 1 (p. 4-50): Proper handling of the circuit
pack by the edge of the faceplate and by the edge of the printed circuit board.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-49
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-24 Circuit pack handling - Example 1
pack by the edges of the printed circuit board
Recommended Handling (Newer Style)
Figure 4-26, Circuit pack handling - Example 3 (p. 4-51) and Figure 4-27, Circuit
pack handling - Example 4 (p. 4-51) are the new styles of OAs/LDs, with protective
shield covering the printed circuit board.
pack by the edge of the faceplate and by the edge of the printed circuit board.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-50
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
pack by the faceplate latches.
Improper Handling
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-51
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT: Do not mishandle circuit boards. It is possible to damage internal fibers and
components on Line Driver (LD) and Optical Amplifier (OA) circuit packs if they are
physically mishandled.
Figure 4-28, Improper handling of the circuit pack - Example 5 (p. 4-52): Improper
handling of the circuit pack - Left thumb is placed such that undue damage may occur to
the internal fibers that run under the ribbon cable.
Figure 4-28 Improper handling of the circuit pack - Example 5
Figure 4-29, Improper handling of the circuit pack - Example 6 (p. 4-53): Improper
handling of the circuit pack - Fingers are placed on the horizontal surface of the board.
This may cause undue damage to fibers or components on the pack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-52
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-29 Improper handling of the circuit pack - Example 6
OSC SFP Equipage
DO NOT: Do not mishandle circuit boards. It is possible to damage internal fibers and
components on Line Driver (LD) and Optical Amplifier (OA) circuit packs if they are
physically mishandled.
When equipping the OSC SFP, read and understand the Optical Amplifier/Line Driver
installation section of the 1830 PSS Installation and System Turn-Up Guide.
Set the LD/OA flat on an electrostatic discharge (ESD) safe work surface before
attempting to remove or equip the OSC SFP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-53
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-30 Proper LC Connector Handling
Figure 4-31 Broken OSC Fibers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-54
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
Use this procedure to make changes to system properties including temperature units and
AINS timer. The AINS timer value is system-wide and is the default for all ports; the
value can be overridden on each individual port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If using the CLI, continue to Procedure - CLI (p. 4-55).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If using the WebUI, continue to Procedure - WebUI (p. 4-55).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Procedure - CLI
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To change the AINS timer value, type config general ainstimer <hours> and
<Enter>.
Where <hours> is of the format <hh> [<mm>]. You can also type
config general ainstimer help for the default value and range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The temperature unit defaults to Celsius. To change the temperature units to Fahrenheit,
type config admin tempUnits fahrenheit and <Enter>.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Procedure - WebUI
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, click System on the left pane.

Result: The System Properties screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify the AINS timer value, select the AINS timer value in hours and minutes from
the list.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-55
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The maximum value supported is 96 hours.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify the temperature unit setting, select from Temperature Units: list.
The default temperature unit is Celsius and can be changed to Fahrenheit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Submit to update the changes.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-56
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Background
There are different FTP server software applications available. This procedure provides
detailed configuration instructions using one of the most common platforms, FileZilla.
However, the steps can be used as a reference for configuring other FTP server
applications. Consult the documentation for your specific FTP server software for
detailed instructions.
Note:
1. The FTP server for software download and Database Backup are configured
separately. FTP/SFTP can be provisioned for Software download server, and
TFTP/FTP/TFTP can be provisioned for Database Backup server.
2. Note that TFTP is sensitive to the number of the GCC/OSC spans, but SFTP/FTP
is not. Therefore, for DB back-up case, TFTP is not recommended for multi-span
configuration over GCC/OSC. Generally, SFTP/FTP is recommended for
multi-span download/backup case.
3. FTP and SFTP has a similar transfer speed for both DB backup and Software
download. Generally, FTP is faster than SFTP, as it has a higher overhead
efficiency.
4. However, Note that FTP has Windows/Linux Compatibility issue for Software
download . If the FTP Server is a Windows Server, the download speed will be
reduced by half . The SFTP Sever is generally working fine in both
Windows/Linux for both Software downloading and DB backup.
Purpose
This procedure provides more detail to the steps listed in FTP server preparation
(p. 4-15).
Prerequisites
The FTP server application must be downloaded and installed on the PC. The FileZilla
server software can be downloaded from (http://filezillaproject.org/download.php?type=
server).
Procedure
Disable the firewall on the PC

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open Windows Firewall from the Control Panel.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-57
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Off. Then click OK.

FTP server configuration using FileZilla
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Start the FileZilla server software.

Result: The Connect to Server screen opens as shown in Figure 4-32, FileZilla
connect to server window (p. 4-58).

Figure 4-32 FileZilla connect to server window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Leave the default settings and click OK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-58
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The server screen opens as shown in Figure 4-33, FileZilla server window
(p. 4-59).
Figure 4-33 FileZilla server window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-59
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Edit -> Groups from the top menu as shown in Figure 4-34, FileZilla groups
menu (p. 4-60).
Figure 4-34 FileZilla groups menu
Result: The Groups screen opens as shown in Figure 4-35, FileZilla groups window
(p. 4-60).
Figure 4-35 FileZilla groups window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-60
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
With the General page highlighted in the left pane, click Add on the right pane.
Result: The Add user group dialog screen opens as shown in Figure 4-36, FileZilla
add group window (p. 4-61).

Figure 4-36 FileZilla add group window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter a group name in the Add user group dialog screen and click OK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-61
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Shared folders page in the left pane and the Groups screen changes as shown
in Figure 4-37, FileZilla groups shared folders window (p. 4-62).
Figure 4-37 FileZilla groups shared folders window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-62
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Add and a browse screen opens as shown in Figure 4-38, FileZilla browse folder
window (p. 4-63).
Figure 4-38 FileZilla browse folder window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Browse to the folder where Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 software is or will be copied to,
and select it. Then click OK.
Note: Create a folder, if needed, for the software before performing this step.
Result: The folder appears in the directories screen.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
With the newly added folder selected, ensure that the Read and Write check-boxes are
selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Click Set as home dir.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
Click OK to close the screen.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-63
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Select Edit -> Users from the top menu as shown in Figure 4-39, FileZilla users menu
(p. 4-64).
Figure 4-39 FileZilla users menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-64
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Users screen opens as shown in Figure 4-40, FileZilla users window
(p. 4-65).
Figure 4-40 FileZilla users window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
With the General page highlighted, click Add on the right pane.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-65
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Add user account screen opens as shown in Figure 4-41, FileZilla add
user window (p. 4-66).

Figure 4-41 FileZilla add user window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
Type a user account name in the top dialog box.

Note: The account name is the user id used in Configure the software environment
and load, and commit the software (p. 4-14).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
Select the group created in Step 7 from the list and click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
Check the Password check-box and type a password in the dialog box.
Note: This is the password used in Configure the software environment and load,
and commit the software (p. 4-14).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
Select the group created in Step 7 from the Group Membership list.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-66
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
Select the Shared folders page in the left pane and the Users screen changes as shown in
Figure 4-42, FileZilla users shared folders window (p. 4-67).
Figure 4-42 FileZilla users shared folders window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21
Click Add.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-67
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: A browse window opens as shown in Figure 4-43, FileZilla browse folder
window (p. 4-68).

Figure 4-43 FileZilla browse folder window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22
Browse to the folder where the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 software is or will be copied
to, and select it. Then click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23
The folder appears in the directories screen. With the newly added folder selected, ensure
that the Read and Write check-boxes are checked.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24
Click Set as home dir.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25
Click OK to close the screen.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-68
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
5
Overview
Purpose
The procedures in this chapter should be used when adding new wavelength services to
an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 network. In addition to provisioning the new service,
several steps must be followed to ensure that the service reaches the correct operational
power levels.
Contents
5-2
Perform power adjustments
5-13
Delete wavelength service
5-29
Provision transponder for connection to an unmanaged network element
5-34
5-min timer during service turn-up
5-41
5-46
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-1
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
This procedure provides the steps required to provision a new wavelength service
between transponders installed at two end-point nodes. The procedure assumes that the
transponders have already been installed and fibered in the nodes, and the Alcatel-Lucent
1354 RM-PhM server is up and connected to the network.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identify the transponders that have been installed and fibered to carry the wavelength
service.
Note: When a CFP must be installed, remove the OT circuit pack from the shelf and
then replace or insert the CFP. Ensure the CFP is seated securely and seat the OT
circuit pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on one of the nodes at the wavelength end point and select Provision ->
Physical Topology...from the menu. See Figure 5-1, 1354 RM-PhM physical topology
menu (p. 5-2).
Figure 5-1 1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-2
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Physical Topology window will display as shown in Figure 5-2, Alcatel-Lucent
1354 RM-PhM physical topology window (p. 5-3).
Figure 5-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click the Line (L1) port of the transponder card.
If a B-end Point connection is displayed at the bottom of the screen and matches how
the transponder is physically fibered, skip to Step 7.
If a B-end Point is not displayed, the topological link needs to be provisioned.

Continue to the next step.
Note: Typically the topological link for the transponder will only be present if it was
part of the EPT plan.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
With the transponder Line (L1) port still highlighted, select the port where the other end
of the fiber is connected (CWR8, CWR8-88, or filter).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-3
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: If the other port is on a different shelf, first select the appropriate shelf on the
equipment tree on the left.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
With both ports highlighted, click Connect the fiber endpoints as shown in Figure 5-3,
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology connect button (p. 5-4).
Figure 5-3 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology connect button
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Close the Physical Topology window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat Step 2 through Step 7 for the second transponder at the other end point.
Enable transponder ports
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM topological view, double-click one of the nodes
at an endpoint of the service.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-4
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
The NE inventory window opens similar to that shown in Figure 5-4, Alcatel-Lucent
1354 RM-PhM NE inventory window (p. 5-5).
Figure 5-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE inventory window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Click the client port of the transponder card that carries the service.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-5
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Right-click on the unassigned client port in the equipment tree and select Assign Port
from the menu. See Figure 5-5, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM unassigned port menu
(p. 5-6).
Figure 5-5 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM unassigned port menu
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
An assign port window appears as shown in Figure 5-6, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM
assign client port (p. 5-6).
Figure 5-6 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM assign client port
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
From the list, select the service type that to be transported and click OK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-6
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
Right-click on the assigned client port and select Administration -> Interface Admin
Status up as shown in Figure 5-7, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM client admin status up
menu (p. 5-7).
Figure 5-7 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM client admin status up menu
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
Close the NE inventory window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
Has the second transponder card been provisioned yet?

If yes, continue to Step 18.
If no, go back to Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
Close the physical topology window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
In the topological view of the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM, identify the two NEs at the
end-points of the wavelength service on the map.
Left-click on the NE and hold the <Ctrl> key to select both NEs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-7
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
Select Provision -> Provision Wavelength Service from the top menu. See Figure 5-8,
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service menu (p. 5-8).
Figure 5-8 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-8
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21
The Provision New Wavelength Service window opens as shown in Figure 5-9,
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 1 (p. 5-9).
Figure 5-9 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22
Type a service name (any name).

Select a layer rate supported by the OTs installed in the two-terminal nodes.
The Force XC creation option should be checked if this is a wavelength service used for
initial commissioning of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-9
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provision the remaining parameters as required by the wavelength service including any
protection options.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23
Click Next> to display the port details as shown in Figure 5-10, Alcatel-Lucent 1354
RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 2 (p. 5-10).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-10
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24
Select the aid of each transponder for the A-end and Z-end. Then click Next> to display
the wavelength service details as shown in Figure 5-11, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM
provision wavelength service step 3 (p. 5-11).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-11
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25
Verify that the provisioning is correct and click Finish to display the service attributes
window as shown in Figure 5-12, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength
service step 4 (p. 5-12).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26
Select one of the service options and click OK.

Result: The wavelength service completion window is displayed as shown in Figure
5-13, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 5 (p. 5-12).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27
If this is a commissioning service, return to the commissioning procedure.

If the service is being added after commissioning, continue to Perform power
adjustments (p. 5-13).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-12
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
If the path through the network the new service takes crosses lines whose optical power
management type is set to Manual, the system will create expected powers and default
power deviations at only two key points per line, the ingress line's ingress LD Sig Out
port and the egress line's LD Line Out port. The goal of the service turn-up procedure is
to modify the light path's power using a combination of add target power setpoint
adjustment, LD gain adjustment, and manual pad placement to try to reach the expected
powers set up by the system.
Note: Lines of FOADM nodes and lines following FOADM lines, services in
existence before the new service is added may deviate from their initial target powers.
This is normal and the deviation thresholds around the expected power have been
calculated to take into account this shift in per channel powers.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wait for 2 mins for the power to ramp up after creating the service before continuing.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click the Power (A-Z) button on the wavelength service completion window (See Figure
5-13, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision wavelength service step 5 (p. 5-12))
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-13
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The power management service window opens as shown in Figure 5-14,
1354 RM-PhM power management service (p. 5-14).

Figure 5-14 1354 RM-PhM power management service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The power management type is displayed on the top of each power bar in the light path
trace.
If all the lines are auto power managed, no further adjustment is required. Jump to Step
38.
Otherwise continue to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Is the egress line of the origination point of the service auto managed?
If yes, skip to Step 9.
If no, continue to Step 5.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-14
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Adjust the transponder output power level by selecting and dragging the zed bar to the
middle of the transponders power range (light blue bar) as shown in Figure 5-15,
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment (p. 5-15).
Figure 5-15 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-15
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
A warning appears similar to Figure 5-16, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM zed bar
adjustment (p. 5-16). Click Yes.
Figure 5-16 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wait for 30 secs and watch the effect on the wavelength egress power level on the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Continue to adjust the transponder power level until the wavelength leaves the NE near
the middle of the zed bar at the egress point.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Is the next ingress line in the path auto power managed?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-16
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Move the mouse over the power bar for the Sig out port at the ingress of the NE. Actual
and expected power levels will display similar to Figure 5-17, Alcatel-Lucent 1354
RM-PhM power level reading (p. 5-17).
Figure 5-17 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power level reading
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Calculate the difference between the expected and actual power levels. Record this
number.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-17
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Right-click on the power bar of the Sig out port and select All Channel Powers as shown
in Figure 5-18, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM channel powers menu selection
(p. 5-18).
Figure 5-18 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM channel powers menu selection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-18
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
The power levels for each of the channels with be displayed on a chart as shown in Figure
5-19, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM all channel powers (p. 5-19).
Figure 5-19 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM all channel powers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-19
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Locate the Power Gain (dB) attribute on the right side of the window as shown in Figure
5-20, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM set power gain (p. 5-20). Add the value calculated
in Step 11 to the current value in the field.
Figure 5-20 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM set power gain
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
Type the new power gain value in the field and click Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
Wait for 30 secs and observe the average channel power levels.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
If the channel power level is not green or within the zed bar, repeat Step 10 through Step
16.
If the ingress power level is green and within the zed bar, the power adjustment is
complete. Continue to next step.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-20
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Refer to Troubleshooting failed adjustments (p. 6-74) if there are problems
achieving the proper power level.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
Is the next egress line in the path auto power managed?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
These next steps require someone to be on-site to provide padding.

Note: Pad changes should not be required if the channel is directed through the NE
using the express ports. Those pads should already be set, and this procedure will only
verify the power levels.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-21
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
Move the mouse over the power bar for the egress point of the NE. Actual and expected
power levels displayed are similar to Figure 5-21, 1354 RM-PhM power level reading
(p. 5-22).
Figure 5-21 1354 RM-PhM power level reading
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21
Calculate the difference between the expected and actual power levels.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22
Provide the calculated value to the person on-site and pad the path between the ingress
and egress lines by the same amount.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23
Wait for 30 secs and observe the power level at the egress point of the NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-22
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24
If the egress power level is not green or within the zed bar, repeat Step 20 through Step 23
.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25
complete. Continue to Step 26.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26
Is the next NE in the signal path the Z end containing the transponder?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27
Is the ingress line of the Z end NE in the signal path automatically managed?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-23
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28
Move the mouse over the power bar for the Sig out port at the ingress of the NE. Actual
and expected power levels will display similar to Figure 5-22, Alcatel-Lucent 1354
RM-PhM power level reading (p. 5-24).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29
number.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-24
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
30
Right-click on the power bar of the Sig out port and select All Channel Powers as shown
in Figure 5-23, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM channel powers menu selection
(p. 5-25).
Figure 5-23 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM channel powers menu selection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-25
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
31
The power levels for each of the channels is displayed on a chart as shown in Figure 5-24,
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM all channel powers (p. 5-26).
Figure 5-24 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM all channel powers
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
32
Locate the Power Gain (dB) attribute on the right side of the window as shown inFigure
5-25, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM set power gain (p. 5-27).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-26
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Add the value calculated in Step 29 to the current value in the field.
Figure 5-25 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM set power gain
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
33
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
34
Wait for 30 secs and observe the average channel power levels.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
35
If the channel power level is not green or within the zed bar, repeat Step 28 through Step
34.
Note: Refer to Troubleshooting failed adjustments (p. 6-74) if there are problems
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-27
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
36
Synchronize the wave key expected powers to the measured powers by clicking the icon
as indicated in Figure 5-26, 1354 RM-PhM all channel powers (p. 5-28).
Figure 5-26 1354 RM-PhM all channel powers
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
37
If prompted for confirmation, click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
38
Click the Power (Z-A) button in the wavelength service completion window. Repeat
Step 3 through Step 37 in the Z to A direction.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
39
If a protection service exists, repeat the power adjustment steps for the protection service.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-28
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
This procedure provides the steps required to delete a wavelength service previously
provisioned using Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM. This procedure will also remove the
topological links for the transponders associated with the wavelength service.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identify the wavelength serve to be deleted and the transponders at the end-points of the
service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Topology View, select one of the NEs at an end point of the service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Provision -> Show Wavelength Services from the top menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Wavelength service list for that NE is displayed similar to Figure 5-27,
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power management provisioning (p. 5-29).
Figure 5-27 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power management provisioning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-29
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select and highlight the wavelength service to be deleted and click the Delete button. The
Delete button is shaped like an X as in Figure 5-28, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM
delete button (p. 5-30).
Figure 5-28 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM delete button
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
A warning message appears as shown in Figure 5-29, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM

power management provisioning (p. 5-30).
Figure 5-29 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power management provisioning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Yes. The service is now deleted.

Delete topological links created for the transponders
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following steps are only required if the topological links need to be deleted. If this
was a commissioning service, and the links were created for the service, those links
should be deleted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-30
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click one of the nodes containing a transponder card at an end point of the deleted
service and select Provision -> Physical Topology...from the menu. See Figure 5-30,
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu (p. 5-31).
Figure 5-30 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-31
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
The Provision Topology window is displayed as shown in Figure 5-31, Alcatel-Lucent

1354 RM-PhM provision topology window (p. 5-32).
Figure 5-31 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision topology window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Click the Line (L1) port of the transponder card.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-32
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Click the delete topological link button which is located to the right of the Connect
button. See Figure 5-32, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology disconnect
button (p. 5-33).
Figure 5-32 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology disconnect button
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
A warning message appears as shown in Figure 5-33, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM

physical topology disconnect warning (p. 5-33). Click Yes.
Figure 5-33 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology disconnect warning
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Close the Physical Topology window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
Repeat Step 9 through Step 14 for the second transponder.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
If this was part of a commissioning procedure, return to the relevant procedure.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-33
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
Provision transponder for connection to an unmanaged

network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

network element
Background
The line interface of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 transponders can be fibered directly
to another network element, unmanaged by the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM for
transport. For this application, the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 transponder provides a
signal (without WaveTracker encoding) to the unmanaged network. The transponder itself
is installed in an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 shelf and is managed by the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-4 node. This interworking application is sometimes called the Dangling OT
Feature.
A dangling OT, or a group of dangling OTs, are Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 optical
transponders which are plugged into an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 shelf and managed by
the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 node. However, the dangling OT line side optical ports
(transmit and receive) are not fiber-connected to a CWR or OMD pack in the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 NE.
Overview
This procedure provides the steps required to provision an Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4
transponder to transmit to an unmanaged NE. The procedure assumes that the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 network has been installed and commissioned, and the
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM server is up and connected to the network.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Install the transponder in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 shelf that will be connected to
the unmanaged NE, if not installed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fiber the network ports of the transponder to the unmanaged NE. Refer to the user
documentation for the unmanaged NE for connection and provisioning information.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM topological view, double-click the

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 node with the transponder installed in Step 1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-34
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections

network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The NE inventory window opens similar to as shown in Figure 5-34, Alcatel-Lucent

1354 RM-PhM NE inventory window (p. 5-35).
Figure 5-34 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE inventory window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-35
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections

network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on the client port of the transponder connected to the 1696. Select Assign
Port from the menu Figure 5-35, 1354 RM-PhM unassigned port menu (p. 5-36).
Figure 5-35 1354 RM-PhM unassigned port menu
Result: An assign port window appears as shown in Figure 5-36, Alcatel-Lucent
1354 RM-PhM assign client port (p. 5-36).

Figure 5-36 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM assign client port
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the list, select the service type to be transported and click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Line (L1) port of the same transponder.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-36
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections

network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click the list next to the ITU (Programmed) attribute as shown in Figure 5-37,
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM define ITU channel (p. 5-37).
Select the ITU channel to be transported across the unmanaged network.
Figure 5-37 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM define ITU channel
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provision any additional attributes that are required by the unmanaged network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Determine the output power expected by the unmanaged network element and type this
value into the Programmed Network Output Power field as shown in Figure 5-38,
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE programmed network output power (p. 5-38).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-37
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections

network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Apply.
Figure 5-38 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE programmed network output power
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Wait several seconds and click Refresh. Observe the Present network output power.
Continue to click Refresh until the powers are roughly equal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Close the NE Inventory window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-38
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections

network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
From the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM, right-click on the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4
shelf, with the transponder connected to the 1696 ROADM and select Provision ->
Physical Topology... from the menu. See Figure 5-39, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM
physical topology menu (p. 5-39).
Figure 5-39 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM physical topology menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-39
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections

network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Provision Topology window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Right-click on the Line (L1) port of the transponder card connected to the unmanaged NE
and select Create Unmanaged External Connection as shown in Figure 5-40,
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM create unmanaged external connection (p. 5-40).
Figure 5-40 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM create unmanaged external connection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
A warning appears as shown in Figure 5-41, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM unmanaged

connection warning (p. 5-40).
Figure 5-41 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM unmanaged connection warning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-40
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections

network element
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
The Enter external topology window appears as shown in Figure 5-42, Alcatel-Lucent
1354 RM-PhM enter external topology window (p. 5-41). Enter the IP address of the
unmanaged network element followed by the shelf/slot/port of the fiber connection point
in the format shown in the window.
Figure 5-42 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM enter external topology window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
Click OK and External is displayed next to the L1 port in the topology window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
Close the provision topology window.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Overview
A network service created by OS (for example, PhM), is comprised of a number of

Photonic Cross-connects on each of the nodes between the service end-points. The
following figure shows a service (red line) created from Node A to Node Z through Node
C. In regard to this service, the Node A is the add node, Node C is the thru node and
Node Z is the drop node.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-41
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-43 An example of network service
When a service is created, the related optical channel can be provisioned to be modulated
by keys based on proprietary Wavelength Tracker technology, and we call such service is
keyed service. Similarly for service without the channel modulated, we call it un-keyed
service.
The keys are actually the identification for each channel in the optical network. During
photonic cross-connect creation, the keys are assigned by the system/network
automatically (that is, auto-keyed) or by user manually (that is, manual-keyed). With the
assistance of keys, the network can easily support wavelength routes tracking, power
management, performance monitoring and fault location and so on. From a power
management perspective, the Software Controlled Optical Transmission (SCOT)
algorithm can automatically adjust the optical channel power in the network, based on
retrieved optical channel power information for keyed service, this is also called
auto-power management.
During the service creation or deletion, some transmission defects could exist for a while.
However, it is not necessary to raise the transient condition during service turn-up. For
instance, from optical power management perspective, the channel power ramps towards
the goal, there is no need to raise Optical Channel Optical Power Out of Range (OCH
OPR), since this is an expected behavior at service turn-up. When the wavelength is being
turned up, there is no need to report any OCH layer defects for the service, since we know
the wavelength is in a transitory state. The timer length has been chosen to be consistent
with the worst case time for power levels to completely settle, when all the lines along the
lightpath are auto-power managed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-42
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Turn-up process for auto-power managed and auto-keyed service
When a service is created by the OS (PhM), then the photonic cross-connections are also
created along the path including add node, drop node and thru node (if present). Upon the
creation of photonic cross-connection, the Optical Channel Payload Defect Indication
(OCH PDI) condition is immediately raised on add node (at the point of Wavelength key
encoder, for example, SVAC or OT line port). Upon the creation of the photonic
cross-connection, the Optical Channel Forward Defect Indication (OCH FDI) condition is
immediately raised on the through and drop nodes at the node ingress point (ingress OA
port). While OCH PDI or OCH FDI is raised, other OCH conditions are masked (for
example, OCH OPR, OCH LOS, and so on) on the node along the path of the channel.
Note that OCH PDI and OCH FDI are not reported conditions, meaning that they are not
issued off node to an NMS or alarm monitoring system; they are used only to suppress the
reporting of other conditions by degrading their severity to not reported. For example, at
the drop node the OT line port may see LOS-P during turn-up (normally critical service
affecting), and this is degraded to not reported.
Figure 5-44 An example of turn-up process for an auto-power managed and
auto-keyed service
The add node will send information indicating whether or not the channel for the photonic
cross-connection at the add node is leaving the node with appropriate power. Initially
when the add photonic cross-connection is created the node advertises that the channel is
not at appropriate power.
The Software Controlled Optical Transmission (SCOT) algorithm on add node will ramp
the optical channel power towards the target power at the node egress. When the egress
target power is reached within a defined tolerance, the node emits a Link State
Advertisement (LSA, distribute key information) informing downstream nodes that it is
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-43
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
launching power and starts a 5-minute timer to clear its OCH PDI. When downstream
nodes (thru node and drop node) receive the LSA, they also begin 5-minute timers to
clear their own OCH FDI condition. When the timers expire, the PDI/FDI conditions are
lowered, and any other OCH-related conditions will be visible if present, for example the
LOS-P condition at the OT line port at drop node will be reported with original severity of
Critical.
Note:
The timer period is 10-minute in the case the node is designed and deployed in a
long haul optical transmission context.
The PSS32/16 DWDM application always requires OA at the NE boundary. If the

ingress OA is not provisioned, then there will be no place to report OCH FDI.
However, the user would still be able to see OCH FDI information in Photonic
cross-connection secondary state.
Above example Figure 5-44, An example of turn-up process for an auto-power
managed and auto-keyed service (p. 5-43) is only for A-to-Z direction. A
bi-directional service will have similar conditions/processes raised/ongoing in the
other direction.
Turn-up process for auto-power managed and manual-keyed service
For auto-power managed and manual-keyed service, the service turn-up process is similar
to the auto-power managed and auto-keyed case. The difference is that for the auto-power
managed and auto-keyed case, the 5-minute timer is started once the thru node and drop
node receives the LSA message carrying key info emitted from add node, while for
auto-power managed and manual-keyed service the 5-minute timer is started once the
local Photonic cross-connection is provisioned (during this process the keys for ingress
direction and egress direction are manually assigned by user). This is actually the
difference between auto-keyed and manual-keyed cases, irrelevant of auto-power
managed or manual-power managed.
For manual-power managed and keyed service, irrespective of auto-keyed or
manual-keyed, the system/network will not automatically adjust the optical power. The
user needs to set the power/attenuation/gain manually along the service path. This
includes the OT line port, MVAC/SVAC, fast eVOA, CWR, OA and so on. The 5-minute
timer is supported for this case. However, since this procedure may take longer than
5-minutes blackout period, it is possible that alarms (LOS-P severity transitions from Not
Reported to Critical) will be seen during manual power adjustment.
One exceptional behavior of manual-keyed case compared with auto-keyed case,
irrespective of auto-power managed or manual-power managed, is that the OCH FDI or
OCH PDI condition will not be raised. Therefore, it is invisible to user, although the
minute timer to suppress OT alarm (for example, LOS-P reported as Not Reported) is still
supported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-44
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For manual-power managed and unkeyed service, there is no OCH FDI or OCH PDI
suppression mechanism or 5-minutes timer, therefore the OT alarm will be normally
reported (for example, LOS-P reported with severity as Critical).
Above behaviors are normal for Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) being ready.
Although Generic Communication Channel (GCC) is also able to distribute the LSA
message carrying key info, the SCOT auto-power management is only supported when
OSC channel is ready.
In case of both OSC and GCC not ready, there is no channel to communicate LSA in the
network. For this case, the photonic cross-connects must be created as manually keyed.
When a manually keyed connection is created (whether auto-power managed or
manual-power managed), the OCH FDI and OCH PDI countdown timers begin
immediately after photonic cross-connect creation. As described above, OCH layer
conditions will be degraded to not reported until the timer expires, after which they will
be reported with their normal severity.
If though wrong provisioning, some of the photonic cross-connects were created as auto
keyed when there is no OSC or GCC ready to communicate LSAs in the network, then
the nodes would raise OCH FDI or OCH PDI as normal. The add node could clear its
OCH PDI since the information of power achieved is local, and it can begin its
countdown timer. However, through or drop node cross-connects would not receive the
LSA for power achieved from the add node; therefore the cross-connects would remain in
OCH FDI and would cause the other OCH layer defects to be not reported. This case of
wrong provisioning.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-45
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before you begin
The following procedure is an example for configuring the keyed services on the 1830
PSS-4 Regen link. 11DPE12 circuit pack is used to carry the service passing the bus link
from end to end.
Go direction: CVLAN ID=101, SVLAN ID=201, DWDM frequency = 9130
Return direction: CVLAN ID=102, SVLAN ID=202, DWDM frequency = 9130
Figure 5-45 1830 PSS-4 Regen bus link
Procedure for terminal configuration
This section describes the procedure for terminal configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select the 11DPE12 card from the equipment tree
Result: The Card Properties screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For both the terminals, provision the GbE on C1, OTU2 on L1 and OCH on VA1 ports.
Refer to the port provisioning procedure section in Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 User Provisioning Guide for the
detailed procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create VTS for C1 and L1 for both the terminals.

Reference: Refer Provision VTS (p. 5-51) for the detailed procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create EVPL connection for both the terminals.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-46
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference: Refer Create EVPL fullrate in User Provisioning Guide for the detailed
procedure for EVPL in fullrate mode and Create EVPL Subrate and Q-in-Q in User
Provisioning Guide for Subrate and Q-in-Q modes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Complete the physical connection as shown in the following Figure, where

L1->VA1-->9310, OMD<-->Sig line<--> external, Loopback - DCM.
Reference: Refer to Provision Physical topology in User Provisioning Guide for the
detailed procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Procedure for ILA configuration
This section describes the procedure for ILA configuration.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-47
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, select the OA card AHPHG from the equipment tree.
Result: The Card Properties screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provision the AHPHG card ports. Refer to the Port Provisioning procedures section in
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release
6.0 User Provisioning Guide for the detailed procedure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-48
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Complete the physical connection as shown in the following figure, where 1/7/Sig
<-->1/8/Sig, 1/7/Line<--> external, Loopback DCM. Refer to Provision Physical
topology in User Provisioning Guide for the detailed procedure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-49
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure for Cross-connection
This section describes the procedure for Cross-connection.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create OCH Cross-connections on both the terminals. Refer to Provision

Cross-connections in User Provisioning Guide for detailed procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The cross-connection in an ILA configuration is as shown in the following figure.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-50
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provision VTS
This section describes the procedure to create Virtual time-slot map on L1 or client port
(C1-C21).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the WebUI, from the equipment tree, select the 11DPE12 card and the L1 port.
Note: For creating VTS on client port, select the Client port (C1-C21).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on the VTS port.

Result: The Create Virtual Time Slot Map screen is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the timeslot from the VTS: list

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the direction from the Direction: list.

The options available are Egress, Ingress and Ingress and Egress.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the relevant classification mode.

The options available are CE-VLAN Tagged, SE-VLAN Tagged and Untagged.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter a CE-VLAN ID.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Submit to update the changes.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Procedure for Add-drop Service
This section describes the procedure to add/drop service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Add CVLAN ID=101/102 from tester on go/return direction.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Adjust the optical power at every end.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Complete the fiber connection.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-51
Issue 1 June 2013
Circuit connections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Drop the CVLAN ID=101/102 to the tester.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-52
Issue 1 June 2013
S6ystem Turn-up and

commissioning
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides the detailed procedures required to commission the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-4 network using the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager (1354
RM-PhM) along with the Commissioning and Power Balancing (CPB) tool.
Contents
Network commissioning background
6-2
Preconditioning procedure
6-5
6-7
6-14
Commission a FOADM system
6-23
6-42
Prepare unkeyed FOADM system for additional services
6-53
6-58
6-59
6-60
Generate and review system loss report
6-67
Troubleshooting failed adjustments
6-74
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-1
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Network planning overview
The first stage before deploying the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 is network planning using
the Engineering Planning Tool (EPT). Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Engineering and Planning Tool
User Guide for the procedures used to plan the network. During the planning stage the
equipment required to meet the demands of the network is defined. The network can be
planned to support demands in the future that are not required in the first phase of
deployment. A network is comprised of one or more systems planned in the EPT.
Generally the nodes and fiber spans between nodes will comprise a linear or ring
topology for each system. In a static OADM system, an obvious ring or linear topology
may not be apparent; in this case the topology is referred to as a mesh topology.
When the network is planned and validated the EPT will produce separate commissioning
files for each of the systems that comprise the network (see the following). These files are
used by the Commissioning and Power Balancing (CPB) tool when commissioning the
systems. For more details on the commissioning file format and contents, refer to the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release
6.0 Engineering and Planning Tool User Guide.
Decomposing networks into constituent systems
The EPT segments networks into systems. The CPB tool is designed to operate on one
system at a time. Terminal points in the network and colorless add/drop ports of CWR8 or
CWR8-88 cards demarcate one system from another. Figure 6-1, Decomposition of
mesh network into constituent systems (p. 6-3) illustrates a mesh network. System (1) is
a TOADM ring system, system (2) is a TOADM linear system, system (3) is a TOADM
linear system and systems (4), (5) and (6) are linear FOADM systems. Notice that
systems (4), (5) and (6) are separate FOADM systems due to the fact there is no express
path between them, and they are joined at a multi-degree FOADM NE using loop
connections (channel routing). Also notice that some lines can be auto power managed
and other lines must be manually power managed. All lines connected intranode to create
a FOADM node with line count higher than two must be manually power managed. The
topology and the power management settings of the lines that make up the topology of a
system determine the level of support provided by the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM and
CPB for maintaining optical power levels, upgrading equipment and commissioning each
system. The EPT will produce a commissioning file in .xml format that can be used by
the CPB tool to commission the systems. The content of the file will depend on the type
of equipment found on each line of a system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-2
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-1 Decomposition of mesh network into constituent systems
Use of the CPB tool
The CPB tool can be used in conjunction with Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM or can also
be installed and used as a stand-alone tool. The Provisioning, Commissioning, and Power
Balancing menus and respective functionality of the CPB tool integrated in
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM and the stand-alone CPB are the same. However, the
stand-alone CPB tool requires the user to have access to another Network Management
System (for example, OMS, INC, and so on) or utilize the NE built in user interfaces
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-3
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(CLI or WebUI) to make the relevant adjustments required in support of Provisioning,

Commissioning, and Power Balancing the Network Element that would have otherwise
been performed by utilizing the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM.
Keyed versus unkeyed OCh
There are two distinct types of optical cross-connections, or OCh, that are supported by
the system.
These are:
Keyed OCh: The optical channel is Wavelength Tracker (WT) encoded with Wave
Keys, and can be decoded at WT decode points throughout the network. WT decoders
can raise WT-related alarms for keyed OCh, and will show per channel power levels.
Keyed OCh can be supported on TOADM or FOADM network elements. Keyed OCh
can be transported on lines whose power management settings are Auto or Manual.
Unkeyed OCh: The optical channel is not Wavelength Tracker encoded with Wave
Keys. At WT decoder locations no per channel power levels are reported for unkeyed
OCh, and WT-related alarms are not raised. Unkeyed OCh are only supported on
FOADM network elements. Unkeyed OCh can only be transported on lines whose
power management settings are Manual.
Keyed and unkeyed OCh are not permitted to be mixed on the same network element.
Network designs must be keyed or unkeyed.
Note: Due to the restriction that unkeyed OCh cannot be transported on Auto SCOT
lines, all NE optical lines in the network must be set to SCOT type Manual.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-4
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Use this procedure to ensure that the network and PC is ready for Greenfield
commissioning. This procedure should be completed on all constituent systems as
described in Decomposing networks into constituent systems (p. 6-2) and all network
elements that will be commissioned.
Background
The procedures in the following sections relate to commissioning of a Greenfield system.

A Greenfield system is one that has never been commissioned previously and does not
carry services. These procedures can also be used if all services are removed from a
system to recommission a system. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 1354 RM-PhM
Photonic Manager Release 9.1 EMS Reference Guide for information on maintaining
existing systems.
The procedures in this chapter assume that the customer data communications network
has not been established yet. Therefore, the procedures have been written assuming that
the integration will be completed using a PC directly connected to one of the network
elements in the system to be commissioned.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that all the procedures in Ensure that all the procedures in Equipment installation
have been completed on all network elements in the network to be commissioned.have
been completed on all network elements in the network to be commissioned.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that all the outside plant fibers have been properly connected to the correct line
driver cards on each network element and any necessary Fiber Optic Characterization is
completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The paths of the commissioning services must be predetermined as described in

Commission a FOADM system (p. 6-23) for each FOADM system. Ensure that there
are OT cards installed and fibered in the locations determined by those commissioning
services.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If there are spans with external Raman amplification, a commissioning service must be
established to pass through the Raman amplifiers. If the commissioning services
determined in the previous steps do not pass through all Raman amplifiers, install and
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-5
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
fiber additional OTs to provide commissioning services to pass through the missed
Raman amplifiers. The channel should be as close to the middle of the channel plan as
possible (near 194.00 THz).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each FOADM system to be commissioned, field personnel must be physically present
with attenuation pads at add/drop nodes. If the system is supporting unkeyed OCh, the
field personnel should also have a power meter and a wavelength meter or OSA.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Obtain the loopback IP addresses of all the NEs in the network.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Obtain all the xml commissioning files produced by EPT for each system to be
commissioned and copy them onto the PC that will be used for commissioning.
Important! Ensure that the latest commissioning files are used with the most accurate
fiber data.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that both the client and server Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM software (or relevant
software if another management system is to be used with stand-alone CPB) as well as
the Commissioning and Power Balancing (CPB) tool has been installed on the PC. Refer
to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager Release 9.1 EMS Reference
Guide for detailed procedures on installing and configuring the software.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Continue to Establish connection to the network (p. 6-7) to start PhM and discover all
the nodes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-6
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
This procedure will establish connection to the network and discover all the network
elements. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager Release 9.1
EMS Reference Guide for additional information on configuring the server and client as
well as discovering network elements.
Note: If another management system will be used, refer to the documentation for that
system for discovering the NEs. The procedures in this chapter reference
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM, but the procedures can be performed with another
management system along with stand-alone CPB.
Prepare the PC and NE for autodiscovery of all the NEs
As noted earlier, these procedures are performed with a PC connected to one of the
network elements in the network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connect one end of an Ethernet cable to the CIT port on the active EC card on the NE that
will act as the local connection point and the other end to the Ethernet port on your PC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open a PC command shell and type ipconfig and <Enter>. The NE CIT address is the
Default Gateway. Record this CIT address because it will be changed, and this address
will be needed later.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Telnet to the CIT address and login to CLI. Refer to Connect to the NE for CLI access
(p. 4-12) for more information.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type show interface ec 1/1/cit and <Enter>.

IP Address
: 172.16.0.1/24MAC
Address
: 00:60:1D:7C:56:D0
Admin State
: Up
Up
Redistribute
: Disabled
Disabled
DHCP
: Enabled
1
Conf. Speed
: Auto
Auto
L1/L2 Oper State
Proxy Arp
DHCP_range
Conf. Duplex Mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-7
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Actual Speed
Duplex
: 100.000000 Mbps
Actual Duplex Mode : Full
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type: config interface ec 1/1/cit ip 172.16.2.1/24 and <Enter>. The

purpose of this step is to change the CIT IP address to a unique subnet within the entire
DCN.
WARNING: Changing the local ethernet port IP address may result
in a loss of IP connectivity to this network element
from the local ethernet port only. DCN connectivity will
not be affected.
Enter Yes to confirm and no to cancel.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type: Yes and <Enter>.

Result: Communication to the NE will be lost. Close the telnet session.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Return to the Windows command window and type ipconfig /release and <Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type: ipconfig /renew and <Enter>

Result: This forces the PC to obtain a new IP address from the NE through DHCP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Telnet to the new CIT address and once again log in to the NE through the CLI.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
From the CLI, type: config int ec 1/1/cit red enable and <Enter>.
Result: This turns on route distribution for the CIT port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Start PhM and discover NEs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Start the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM application on your PC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-8
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The 1354 RM-PhM EMS Login window appears as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 6-2 1354 RM-PhM login screen
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Change Server/Port.

Result: The Enter new server/port window appears as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 6-3 1354 RM-PhM new server/port window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the IP address of your PC in the Server: field and do not change the Port: field.
Then click OK.
Result: This takes you back to the login screen.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter your User name and Password. Then click OK.

Note: If this is your first time logging in, the User name is admin and Password is
tropxnms. You will then be required to change the password.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-9
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If this is the first login, you are required to change the password. Enter the new password
twice and click OK. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager
Release 9.1 EMS Reference Guide for information on the password requirements.
Figure 6-4 1354 RM-PhM new server/port window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Management Control Panel: Topology View window appears as shown in Figure
6-5, 1354 RM-PhM topology view screen (p. 6-10).
Figure 6-5 1354 RM-PhM topology view screen
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-10
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the top menu, select Maintenance > Auto Discovery.

Result: The Auto-Discovery Settings window opens as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 6-6 1354 RM-PhM auto discovery settings
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Auto Discovery by IP and click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select File -> New NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-11
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Create Network Element window appear as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 6-7 1354 RM-PhM create network element
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Enter the CIT IP address of the NE directly connected to the PC in the NE IP address
field. Then click Create.
Note: This is the address provisioned in Prepare the PC and NE for autodiscovery of
all the NEs (p. 6-7).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-12
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The messages at the bottom of the window will indicate if the NE was
successfully created.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
The NE appears in the group view as a white box until it is discovered. When it is
discovered, the NE name will be displayed, and the color changes to represent the highest
level alarm on the NE. See the following figure.
Figure 6-8 1354 RM-PhM newly discovered NEs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Additional network elements starts appearing in the map view.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
After the auto discovery is complete, check the NEs that were discovered against the list
of NEs in the network.
If there are any NEs missing, repeat Step 9 through Step 11 for any network elements that
were not auto discovered. However, this time the NE loopback address should be used
rather than the CIT IP address.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Continue to Provision the system (p. 6-14) to begin provisioning all of the network
elements.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-13
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose
This procedure will provision the cards and topological links for all the NEs in each
system of the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4 network using the EPT commissioning file(s) as
input to the CPB tool provisioning wizard. The CPB tool is accessed from Alcatel-Lucent
1354 RM-PhM.
Important! This procedure is to be repeated for each EPT commissioning file
generated for the network.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify all the network elements in the system have been correctly discovered by the
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM. Refer to Establish connection to the network
(p. 6-7) and the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager Release 9.1 EMS
Reference Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the top menu select Provision -> Launch CPB...
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-14
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: An Internet Explorer window opens with the CPB tool login screen as shown
in the following figure.

Figure 6-9 CPB login window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM user name and password and click Login.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-15
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The CPB main window opens as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-10 CPB main window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Commissioning -> Provision System (using plan)... from the top menu.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-16
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Provision System Wizard: Overview window is displayed as shown in

Figure 6-11 CPB provision system wizard overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Next>.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-17
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Provisioning options and wizard options window is displayed as shown
in the following figure.

Figure 6-12 1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard options
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select all the check boxes and click Next>.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-18
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Select Planning Tool Output File window is displayed as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 6-13 1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard select planning tool output file
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Browse and browse to the folder containing the EPT commissioning file for the
system to be commissioned, select the file, and click Open. Then click Next>.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-19
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The provision system node list window is displayed as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 6-14 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM provision system node list
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
All the nodes can be selected for provisioning by clicking >>. A node may be excluded
from provisioning by selecting it in the right half of the window and clicking the <. Click
Next>.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-20
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Provisioning Stages window is displayed as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 6-15 1354 RM-PhM provision system wizard stages
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Review the error report and troubleshoot any problems encountered. Refer to the site
documentation and check for discrepancies between what is expected and what is
installed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
When all steps show Completed, click Finish.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-21
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: This takes you back to the CPB tool main window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Are there additional systems (that is, commissioning files) that have not been
provisioned?
If yes, go to Step 1. If no, continue to next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
The systems are now ready for commissioning.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-22
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Background
A FOADM system may be a ring, linear, or mesh system. The lines on FOADM nodes
with degree 2 or greater are manually power managed. Because of this, OTs must be
installed and wavelength services provisioned to complete commissioning on a FOADM
system.
The following requirements must be met regarding the wavelength/commissioning
services:
1. A commissioning service must cross an express path that will be used in the system at
least once during commissioning to allow the calculation and placement of
attenuating pads (if necessary) in FOADM nodes.
2. A commissioning service must cross every ingress LD in the system at least once
during commissioning to allow the user to adjust the gain of the LD.
3. A commissioning service must cross every line in the system that is Automatically
optical power managed at least once during commissioning to allow the user to trigger
the ingress and egress adjustment functions.
The optimal commissioning routes to provision may have been predetermined during
network planning. If there are no predetermined routes, the user should determine which
paths have not been commissioned and create services over one those paths following the
guidelines above. (Generally it is advantageous to determine the longest routes possible to
minimize the number of transponder deployments or redeployments necessary during the
commissioning phase). When choosing a channel to use for the commissioning service it
is always best to choose one near the middle of the C-band. For example, if bands A and F
of the SFD5 channel plan are dropped along the path, bands B through E are free; choose
the channel at frequency 193.8 THz or 194.1 THz because these channels are nearest the
center of the frequency band.
Figure 6-16, Commissioning service for a FOADM system (p. 6-24) shows a FOADM
linear network with a commissioning service that adds and drops at each of the terminal
NEs of the linear system. This service must not use a channel from bands A, B, C, or G of
the five-channel filter channel plan. In this case a channel at frequency 193.8 THz or
194.1 THz could be used. This commissioning service satisfies the three goals listed
above. Note that cases will exist where a single service cannot be used due to the planned
channel add/drop at each network element. In that case two services will be required that
overlap at least one of the FOADM node express paths.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-23
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-16 Commissioning service for a FOADM system
Procedure
The following is the procedure to Commission a FOADM system:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Commissioning a FOADM system requires the availability of field personnel physically

present at optical add/drop nodes to provide attenuating pad changes if required. Ensure
that field personnel are present as stated in the Preconditioning procedure (p. 6-5).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that the provision system with plan wizard has been run and that the nodes that
make up the system to be commissioned have been provisioned, as stated in Provision
the system (p. 6-14).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that the transponder cards are installed as described in the Preconditioning
procedure (p. 6-5).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identify the wavelength service to be created.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-24
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identify the two transponders at the end points of the service to be created. Determine the
service type that will be provisioned between the transponders.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the procedure, Provision new wavelength service (p. 5-2), to provision the
commissioning service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wait for 2 mins after the service creation for the power to ramp up before continuing.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the wavelength service provisioning completion window is still open as shown in

Figure 6-17, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM wavelength service provisioning
completion (p. 6-25), skip to Step 11 . Otherwise continue to the next step.
Figure 6-17 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM wavelength service provisioning
completion
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select one of the nodes at an end point of the commissioning service and select View ->
Show Wavelength Services from the menu on top.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-25
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Wavelength Services window will open similar to the one shown in
Figure 6-18, 1354 RM-PhM wavelength services (p. 6-26).

Figure 6-18 1354 RM-PhM wavelength services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Select and highlight the commissioning service in the list. The Power (A-Z) button
appears at the top of the window as shown in the following figure. Use this button for the
next step.
Figure 6-19 1354 RM-PhM power A-Z button
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Click Power (A-Z).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-26
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Power Management: service window opens as shown in Figure 6-20,
1354 RM-PhM power adjust (p. 6-27).

Figure 6-20 1354 RM-PhM power adjust
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
The Power Management window displays the power levels along the A to Z path of the
provisioned service. Power adjustments must be made at all the egress and ingress lines.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
Check the Auto Refresh check box so that the effect of the power adjustments can be
viewed immediately.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Is the first NE in the signal path (A-end) automatically managed?

If yes, continue to Step 15
If no, skip to Step 18.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-27
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
Under Power Control (Egress), select aid of the egress point of the A-end of the signal
path from the list and click the Execute.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
After a successful power adjustment, a message indicating that the power management
commissioned flag has been set to true for the line that was adjusted. Click OK.
Figure 6-21 1354 RM-PhM set commissioning flag message
Verify the Result field shows Success. The egress power levels at the A-end must be
green and within the zed bar.
Note: It is possible that on a new system the adjustment could fail the first time. If this
happens, attempt the adjustment again after waiting 30 secs. If the adjustment fails
again follow the troubleshooting steps provided in Troubleshooting failed
adjustments (p. 6-74). This is also true for the remaining power adjustments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
Power adjustment for the first egress line is complete. Go to Step 23 .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-28
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
Adjust the transponder output power level by selecting and dragging the zed bar to the
middle of the transponders power range (light blue bar) as shown in Figure 6-22, 1354
RM-PhM zed bar adjustment (p. 6-29)
Figure 6-22 1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-29
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
A warning appears similar to Figure 6-23, 1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment (p. 6-30).
Click Yes.
Figure 6-23 1354 RM-PhM zed bar adjustment
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
Wait for 30 secs and watch the effect on the wavelength egress power level on the NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21
Continue to adjust the transponder power level until the wavelength leaves the NE near
the middle of the zed bar at the egress point.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22
Power adjustment for the first egress line is complete.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-30
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23
Is the ingress line of the next NE in the signal path automatically managed?
If no, skip to Step 27
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24
Under Power Control (Ingress), select aid of the ingress point of the NE from the list and
click Execute.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25
commissioned flag has been set to true for the line that was adjusted. Click OK. Verify the
Result field shows Success. The ingress power levels at the NE should be green and
within the zed bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26
Power adjustment on the ingress line of the NE is complete. Go to Step 35.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-31
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27
Move the mouse over the power bar for the ingress point power levels will display similar
to Figure 6-24, 1354 RM-PhM power level reading (p. 6-32).
Figure 6-24 1354 RM-PhM power level reading
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28
number.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-32
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29
Right-click on the power bar at the ingress point and select Edit Amp from the power
adjust menu as shown in Figure 6-25, 1354 RM-PhM power adjust menu (p. 6-33).
Figure 6-25 1354 RM-PhM power adjust menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-33
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
30
The Facility/Connection window appears as shown in Figure 6-26, 1354 RM-PhM

facility/connection window (p. 6-34).
Figure 6-26 1354 RM-PhM facility/connection window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
31
Select Power Gain (dB) and add the value calculated in Step 28 to the current value in the
field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
32
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
33
Wait for 30 secs and go back to the Power Management window. Observe the power
level at the ingress point of the NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-34
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
34
If the ingress power level is not green or within the zed bar, repeat Step 27 through Step
32.
Note: Refer to Troubleshooting failed adjustments (p. 6-74), if there are problems
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
35
Move to the egress line of the same NE; is that automatically managed?
If no, skip to Step 39
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
36
Under Power Control (Egress), select aid of the egress point of the NE from the list and
click Execute.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
37
commissioned flag has been set to true for the line that was adjusted. Click OK. Verify
that the Result field shows Success. The egress power level must be Green and within the
zed bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
38
Power adjustment for the first egress line is complete. Go to Step 45.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
39
These next steps require someone to be on-site to provide padding.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-35
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
40
Move the mouse over the power bar for the egress point of the NE. Actual and expected
power levels will display similar to Figure 6-24, 1354 RM-PhM power level reading
(p. 6-32).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
41
Calculate the difference between the expected and actual power levels.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
42
Provide the calculated value to the person on-site and pad the path between the ingress
and egress lines by the same amount.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
43
Wait for 30 secs and observe the power level at the egress point of the NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-36
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
44
If the egress power level is not green or within the zed bar, repeat Step 40 through Step 43
.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
45
Is the next NE in the signal path the Z end containing the transponder?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
46
Is the ingress line of the Z end NE in the signal path automatically managed?
If no, skip to Step 50.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
47
Under Power Control (Ingress), select aid of the ingress point of the Z end NE from the
list and click Execute.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
48
commissioned flag has been set to true for the line that was adjusted. Click OK. Verify
that the Result field shows Success. The ingress power levels at the NE should be green
and within the zed bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
49
Power adjustment on the ingress line of the NE is complete. Go to Step 58.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-37
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
50
Move the mouse over the power bar for the ingress point of the NE. Actual and expected
power levels will display similar to Figure 6-24, 1354 RM-PhM power level reading
(p. 6-32).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
51
number.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-38
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
52
Right-click on the power bar at the ingress point and select Edit Amp from the power
adjust menu as shown in Figure 6-25, 1354 RM-PhM power adjust menu (p. 6-33).
Figure 6-29 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power adjust menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-39
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
53
The Facility/Connection window appears as shown in Figure 6-26, 1354 RM-PhM

facility/connection window (p. 6-34).
Figure 6-30 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM facility/connection window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
54
Select the Power Gain (dB) field and add the value calculated in Step 51 to the current
value in the field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
55
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
56
Wait for 30 secs and go back to the Power Management window. Observe the power
level at the ingress point of the NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-40
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
57
If the ingress power level is not green or within the zed bar, repeat Step 50 through Step
56.
Note: Refer to Troubleshooting failed adjustments (p. 6-74), if there are problems
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
58
Close the Power management window and go back to the wavelength service
completion window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
59
Click Power (Z-A) button in the wavelength service completion window. Repeat Step
12 through Step 58 in the Z to A direction.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
60
Close the wavelength service window. Power adjustments have been completed for the
lines covered by that wavelength service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
61
Go to Delete wavelength service (p. 5-29) to delete the commissioning service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
62
Are there any additional wavelength services that are needed to complete commissioning
on the system?
If yes, go back to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
63
Commissioning on the FOADM system is now complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-41
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Background
Refer to Keyed versus unkeyed OCh (p. 6-4) for more information about unkeyed
networks. Note that the EPT design will explicitly state that the network design is
unkeyed.
An unkeyed system must be commissioned using wavelength (or commissioning)
services using the following guidelines.
1. A commissioning service must cross an express path that will be used in the system at
least once during commissioning to allow the calculation and placement of
attenuating pads (if necessary) in FOADM nodes.
2. A commissioning service must cross every ingress LD in the system at least once
during commissioning to allow the user to adjust the gain of the LD.
3. A commissioning service must be added at every FOADM-1 (terminal) egress line in
the system at least once during commissioning to verify that the equipment is installed
correctly.
The optimal commissioning routes to provision may have been pre-determined during
network planning. If there are no pre-determined routes then the user must determine
which paths have not been commissioned yet and create a service over one of those paths.
Generally it is advantageous to determine the longest routes possible to minimize the
number of transponder deployments or redeployments necessary during the
commissioning phase. When choosing a channel to use for the commissioning service it is
best to choose one near the middle of the C-band. For example, if bands A and F of the
SFD5 channel plan are dropped along the path, bands B through E are free; choose the
channel at frequency 193.8 THz or 194.1 THz because these channels are nearest to the
center of the frequency band.
Figure 6-16, Commissioning service for a FOADM system (p. 6-24) shows a FOADM
linear network with a commissioning service that adds and drops at each of the terminal
NEs of the linear system. This service must not use a channel from bands A, B, C, or G of
the five-channel filter channel plan. In this case a channel at frequency 193.8 THz or
194.1 THz could be used. This commissioning service satisfies the three goals listed
above. Note that cases will exist where a single service cannot be used due to the planned
channel add/drop at each network element. In this case two services will be required that
overlap at least one of the FOADM node express paths.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-42
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-31 Commissioning service for a FOADM system
Procedure
The following is the procedure to Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines:
Important! When following this procedure, note that the ALPFGT has a small gain
setting range in which the gain profile across the C-band is flat. Therefore, Alcatel-Lucent
strongly recommends operating the ALPFGT LD within the Gmin to Gmax parameters from
the EPT. If the gain setting required to eliminate the power error calculated in the
procedure would be outside the gain range it is better to accept the power error and set the
gain setting to the nearest boundary of the gain range (Gmin or Gmax).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Commissioning a FOADM system requires the availability of field personnel physically

present at optical add/drop nodes to provide attenuating pad changes if required. Ensure
that they are present as stated in the Preconditioning procedure (p. 6-5).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that the provision system with plan wizard available in CPB has been run and that
the nodes that make up the system to be commissioned have been provisioned, as stated
in Provision the system (p. 6-14).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-43
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that the transponder cards are installed as described and stated in the
Preconditioning procedure (p. 6-5).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identify the wavelength service to be created. Refer to the detailed description in

Background (p. 6-42).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identify the two transponders at the end points of the service to be created (refer to
Commission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines (p. 6-42) for commissioning service
guidelines). Determine the service type that will be provisioned between the transponders.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the procedure, Provision new wavelength service (p. 5-2), to provision the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wait for 2 mins after the service creation for the power to ramp up before continuing.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Determine the first node in the light path and double-click the node in the Topology View
to open the NE Inventory window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-44
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click the Line port of the egress amplifier for the commissioning service and note the
value of Per channel target output power (dBm). See example in Figure 6-32,
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM per channel target output power (p. 6-45).
Figure 6-32 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM per channel target output power
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-45
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Click the Line port of the transponder used in the commissioning service. Then change
the Programmed Network Output Power to the value noted in Step 9. See Figure 6-33,
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM adjust output power (p. 6-46)
Figure 6-33 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM adjust output power
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
If a wavelength meter or OSA is available on-site, continue to Step 12.

If a wavelength meter or OSA is not available on-site, jump to Step 17 .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Connect a power meter to the Tx Mon port of the egress amplifier for the commissioning
service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
Click the Line port of the egress amplifier. Determine the delta between the Total
Network Power Egress and the power measured by the power meter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Remove the power meter and connect the wavelength meter or OSA to the monitor port.
Observe the channel power on the wavelength meter or OSA for the commissioning
service. Add the delta previously calculated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-46
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
Make adjustments to the transponder Programmed Network Output Power, see Step 10
until the observed channel power plus the delta equals the Per channel target output
power as noted in Step 9. Wait for 30 secs between adjustments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
Jump to Step 23.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
Click the Line port of the egress amplifier. Select Wavelength Tracker -> View Services
from the NE Inventory top menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
The wavelength services list will appear similar to Figure 6-34, Alcatel-Lucent 1354
RM-PhM wavelength services list (p. 6-47). Count the number services present on the
Line port.
Figure 6-34 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM wavelength services list
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
Calculate the total output power using the total channel count noted in Step 18 and the
Per channel target output power as noted in Step 9 .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20
Click Close.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21
Adjust the transponder Programmed Network Output Power Step 10 until the Total
Network Power Egress of the amplifier is equal to the calculated value in Step 19. Wait
for 30 secs between adjustments.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-47
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22
Note the final Total Network Power Egress (Ptarget upstream) and Per channel target
output power (Ptarget upstream).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23
Determine the next node in the light path and double-click it to open the NE inventory
window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24
If there is an ingress amplifier at the next node, continue to Step 25 .

If there is no ingress amplifier, jump to Step 29 .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25
Select the Sig port of the ingress amplifier (Line Out on an ALPFGT). Note the Per
channel target output power (Ptargetdownstream) and the Signal Power Egress
(Poutdownstream).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26
Calculate the amount to adjust the ingress amplifier gain setting using the following
formula.
Delta = (Ptargetdownstream-Ptargetupstream)- and (Poutdownstream-Poutupstream).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27
Change the Power Gain attribute by the delta value calculated in Step 26. See example in
Figure 6-35, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power gain adjustment (p. 6-48).
Figure 6-35 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM power gain adjustment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-48
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28
Obtain new values for Poutdownstream and Poutupstream and recalculate the delta value using
the formula in Step 26. If the absolute delta value is greater than 0.5 dB wait five secs,
and then change the power gain value again. Continue the iterations until the delta is less
than 0.5 dB waiting five secs between changes.
Note: If the gain setting is outside the limits of Maximum Gain and Minimum Gain
there is likely to be an upstream loss problem that must be identified and corrected.
Possible reasons for the problem could be one of the following.
The Poutupstream reading changed due to a disruption at the upstream NE.
Failure to place an input fixed attenuating pad after a short span. Check the EPT
design.
The upstream span loss is too high or too low.

The patch panel connection loss between the fiber span and Line In port of the
receiving network element is too high.
For topologies where the receive direction amplification is provided by an

ALPFGT pack, the loss between the receiving network element Line In port and
the ALPFGT Sig In port may be too high.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29
Determine the egress line of the light path and select the Line port of the egress amplifier.
Note the Total Network Power Egress and the Per channel target output power.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
30

If a wavelength meter or OSA is not available on-site, jump to Step 37.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
31
service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
32
Determine the delta between the Total Network Power Egress and the power measured
by the power meter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
33
service. Add the delta calculated Step 32 .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-49
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
34
Instruct the field personnel to change the attenuating pad on the path between the ingress
line and this egress line equivalent to the difference between the channel power
determined in Step 33 and the Per channel target output power.
Note: If the channel expresses through the EXP port, change the attenuation between
the EXP ports of the interconnected SFD packs. If the channel is connected through
the loop connection between channel ports, change the attenuation between the
channel ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
35
Make attenuation changes until the measured channel power is within 1 dB of the Per
channel target output power.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
36
If the target power is achieved, jump to Step 46.

If the target power cannot be achieved jump to Step 44.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
37
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
38
RM-PhM wavelength services list (p. 6-47). Count the number of services present on the
Line port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
39
Calculate the expected total output power using the total channel count noted in Step 38
and the Per channel target output power.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-50
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
40
Click Close.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
41
Instruct the field personnel to change the attenuating pad on the path between the ingress
line and this egress line equivalent to the difference between the expected total power
calculated in Step 39 and the Total Network Power Egress.
Note: If the channel expresses through the EXP port, change the attenuation between
the EXP ports of the interconnected SFD packs. If the channel is connected through
the loop connection between channel ports, change the attenuation between the
channel ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
42
Make attenuation changes until the Total Network Power Egress is within 1 dB of the
expected total power.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
43
If the target power is achieved, jump to Step 46.

If the target power cannot be achieved continue to Step 44.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
44
If changing fixed attenuators in the ingress to egress line path cannot achieve the Line
Out target power, consider increasing the egress amplifier gain setting if one is present.
Note: The following step must only be taken if all other possibilities are exhausted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
45
Select the Sig port of the ingress amplifier (Line Out on an ALPFGT). Change the Power
Gain attribute by the required amount.
Note: If the gain setting is outside the limits of Maximum Gain and Minimum Gain
there is likely a loss problem within the node that must be identified and corrected.
(Verify the Poutupstream reading has not changed as well).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
46
Repeat Step 22 through Step 43 for each node before terminating node of the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
47
Repeat Step 22 through Step 28 for the terminating node.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
48
Repeat Step 8 through Step 43 for the opposite direction of the light path.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-51
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
49
Go to Delete wavelength service (p. 5-29) to delete the commissioning service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
50
Are there additional wavelength services that are needed to complete commissioning on
the system?
If yes, go back to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
51
There is an optional procedure to prepare the system for additional services. For more
information and detailed procedure, go to Prepare unkeyed FOADM system for
additional services (p. 6-53).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
52

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-52
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Background
After completing the procedureCommission a system with unkeyed FOADM lines

(p. 6-42), through path of the system has been commissioned. This is sufficient to set the
gain settings of the amplifiers in the system and determine the value of any fixed
attenuators required on through transmission path. Every service addition at a FOADM
node in an unkeyed network would require a remeasurement of the output power using an
OSA or wavelength meter to determine the correct add path power to reach the egress
Line Out target power. An optional additional step in commissioning is to determine the
required add path power from each SFD filter to achieve the Line Out target power. The
values determined cannot be stored in the network element, however the operator may
wish to record the values for reference so that when additional services are added using
the SFDs already installed, the required target power for the add path can be set directly.
Transponders are fibered to the SFDs that require the target power. Wavelength services
will be created across the SFDs to determine the values.
Procedure
The following is the procedure to prepare unkeyed FOADM system for additional
services.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Determine the transponder fibered to the SFD for the degree of interest. Create a
wavelength service terminated at that transponder using the procedure Provision new
wavelength service (p. 5-2).
Note: Use a channel from the middle of the channel set supported by the filter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Double-click the add node for the wavelength service to open the NE inventory window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-53
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Line port of the egress amplifier for the wavelength service and note the Per
channel target output power. See Figure 6-32, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM per
channel target output power (p. 6-45).
Figure 6-37 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM per channel target output power
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-54
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click the Line port of the transponder used in the commissioning service. Then change
the Programmed Network Output Power to the value noted in Step 3. See Figure Figure
6-33, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM adjust output power (p. 6-46).
Figure 6-38 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM adjust output power
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If a wavelength meter or OSA is not available on-site, jump to Step 11 .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click the Line port of the egress amplifier. Determine the delta between the Total
Network Power Egress and the power measured by the power meter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
service. Add the delta previously calculated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-55
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Adjust the transponder Programmed Network Output Power (see Step 4) until the
observed channel power plus the delta equals the Per channel target output power as
noted in Step 3. Wait for 30 secs between adjustments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Jump to Step 16.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
RM-PhM wavelength services list (p. 6-47). Count the number services present on the
Line port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
Calculate the total output power using the total channel count noted in Step 12 and the
Per channel target output power as noted in Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Click Close.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
Adjust the transponder Programmed Network Output Power (see Step 4) until the Total
Network Power Egress of the amplifier is equal to the calculated value in Step 13. Wait
for 30 secs between adjustments.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-56
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
Once the power setting required at the transponder Line port has been determined, record
this value for future use as the nominal reference power for this SFD to external Line Out
combination.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
Delete the wavelength service created following the procedure Delete wavelength
service (p. 5-29).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18
Repeat Step 1 through Step 17 for each SFD to Line Out combination on the FOADM
degree being tested.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19
Repeat Step 1 through Step 18 for other degrees in the system being commissioned.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-57
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
The opposite direction port parameter will define the association between two
unidirectional ports. So a Bidirectional cross-connection can be used with different
unidirectional topology connections.
The following are the unidirectional LD packs:
AM2125A - LINEIN, LINEOUT
AM2125B - LINEIN, LINEOUT

AM2318A - LINEIN, LINEOUT
Note: The opposite direction port parameter can only be provisioned on ports that
have an external topology connection. If the port is not externally connected, then the
NE software denies any attempt to provision the associated port.
Steps to provision/delete opposite direction port

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The opposite direction port parameter for each direction of the topology connection can
be provisioned from either port.
For example, either of the following CLI commands will configure the opposite direction
port for both ports.
config interface card shelf/slot/LINEIN oppdirection shelf/slot/
LINEOUT
config interface card shelf/slot/LINEOUT oppdirection shelf/slot/
LINEIN
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The opposite direction port parameter for each direction of the topology connection can
be deleted from either port.
For example, either of the following CLI commands will delete the opposite direction
port for both ports.
config interface card shelf/slot/LINEIN oppdirection delete
config interface card shelf/slot/LINEOUT oppdirection delete
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-58
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
The CIT provisioning was changed to allow discovery of all the network elements. See
Establish connection to the network. Once the commissioning is completed, the NE CIT
provisioning must be returned to the original settings.
Procedure
The following is the procedure to disconnect the PC from the network:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Telnet to the temporary CIT port address and log in to CLI following the procedure
described in Connect to the NE for CLI access (p. 4-12).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config interface ec 1/1/cit red disable and <Enter>

Result: This turns off route redistribution.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type config interface ec 1/1/cit ip <ip> and <Enter>

Where <ip> is the original IP address of the CIT port before it was changed.
Note: Typically this is the default IP address, 172.16.0.1.
WARNING: Changing the local ethernet port IP address may result
in a loss of IP connectivity to this network element
from the local ethernet port only. DCN connectivity will
not be affected.
Enter yes to confirm, no to cancel.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type yes and <Enter>

Result: Communication to the NE is lost. Close the telnet session.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open a Windows command window and type ipconfig /release and <Enter>.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type ipconfig /renew and <Enter>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-59
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: This will force the PC to obtain a new IP address from the NE through DHCP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type ipconfig and <Enter>

Verify the PC has successfully obtained an IP address from the NE, and the Default
Gateway is once again the original CIT IP address.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The PC can now be disconnected from the NE.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Background
The loss report is generated in the following circumstances:
When the network commissioning wizard completes, regardless of whether it

completes successfully.
After adding, removing, or upgrading an NE.
After performing a network power balance.
On demand by the user.
The loss report is only fully supported for systems comprised of Auto managed lines. The
PhM only includes the ingress LD of a FOADM through node and excludes through path
of a FOADM through node.
Overview
The report is generated as an HTML file. Errors are highlighted in red. Warnings are
highlighted in yellow.
This section contains the following topics.
Report organization (p. 6-61)
Report content (p. 6-62)

Loss value field of loss report (p. 6-63)
Notes field of loss report (p. 6-64)
Highlighting in the loss report (p. 6-65)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-60
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Report organization
The loss report details the card and span losses and gains along the A-Z and Z-A paths for
each NE in the ring. The report is organized as follows:
Summary of errors
Losses in the A to Z direction
Span loss node n to node 1
Node 1 status
Node 1 Port to port losses
Span loss node 1 to node 2
Node 2 status
Node 2 Port to port losses

Losses in the Z to A direction
Figure 6-40 Shows a section of the loss report for a span and a node
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-61
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Report content
A summary is provided for each NE in the ring, indicating the status of the last ingress
and egress adjust. The summary is colored red if the NE has an error condition, or yellow
if the NE has a warning condition. The Last ingress result and Last egress result fields
indicate the cause of the error or warning, if applicable. The possible errors and warnings
are detailed in Troubleshooting failed adjustments (p. 6-74).
The following information is reported for each span in the path.
The actual loss (or gain) for the span, in dB

The minimum allowable loss (or gain) for the span, in dB, from the EPT
The maximum allowable loss (or gain) for the span, in dB, from the EPT
The loss value (commission or real time)
Notes that provide additional information in diagnosing errors and warnings. See
Notes field of loss report (p. 6-64) for details.
Table 6-1
Report contents
Term
Explanation
NE loss trace A to Z
The direction of the commissioning signal.
NE loss trace Z to A
The direction of the commissioning signal.
Actual Loss (Gain) (dB)
The Actual loss is the measured loss between two consecutive

Wavelength Tracker detect points. In the case of an amplifier,
the Actual Gain is the current gain setting of the amplifier.
The actual loss must fall between the values specified for the
LPT Min and Max losses. If the adjusts for the node are
successful then no highlighting is applied to the components in
the node and losses outside the range are noted as Loss
accommodated. If at least one of the adjusts for the node in a
given direction has failed recently then highlighting is applied
and action by the user is required. See the following for
highlighting rules.
Note: In the case of a loss report generated after the Greenfield
commissioning wizard has run, some lines may not have been
completed, either due to upstream failures or because lines were
excluded by the wizard. In this case the Actual loss field
indicates n/a for the loss measurements because losses have not
been calculated yet for those lines of the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-62
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-1
Report contents
(continued)
Term
Explanation
LPT Max Loss (Gain) (dB)
The maximum expected card or span loss that is used to plan

the network.
The maximum span loss is obtained by the sum of the nominal
span loss and user-defined patch-panel and fiber loss margin.
Maximum card loss is defined by considering the loss of the
specific component and appropriate connector losses within and
between cards. The component loss is obtained from a
statistical analysis of the component loss data. Total losses
within an NE are derived by a statistical RMS addition of all
the individual cards along through path of the NE.
LPT Nominal Loss (Gain)

(dB)
The nominal card or span loss used to plan the network. Total
nominal loss within an NE is derived by the linear addition of
the nominal card losses.
LPT Min Loss (Gain) (dB)
The minimum expected card or span loss used to plan the

network.
Loss value indicates how the loss value reported was obtained:
Notes
Real time: Wavelength Tracker measurement of the loss
Commission: bulk power measurement of the loss
Provides additional information, as described in Notes field of

loss report (p. 6-64).
Loss value field of loss report
The loss value field indicates how the displayed loss was calculated. Amplifier gains
shown in the loss report are read directly from the LD pack, therefore no text is shown in
the Loss value field.
Table 6-2
Loss value field loss report explanations
Text
Explanation
Real time
Real-time Wavelength Tracker readings were used to calculate

the loss when the report was generated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-63
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-2
Loss value field loss report explanations
(continued)
Text
Explanation
Commission
Commission is displayed when there are no wavelength

services with WT readings available when the report is
generated. The displayed loss is the loss that was calculated
during the last commissioning adjustment.
Commissioning adjustments are defined as:
1. Kitless commissioning adjustments used to commission a
system.
2. Or, WT-based power adjustments when the line has not
been commissioned.
Notes field of loss report
The notes field of a row in the loss report displays additional information to the user.
Table 6-3
Notes field terms and definitions
Note
Explanation
Warning: Loss x.x dB too

high.
The measured loss is x.x dB higher than the maximum loss.
Warning: Loss x.x dB too low
The measured loss is x.x dB lower than the minimum loss.
Error: Loss x.x dB too high
The measured loss is x.x dB higher than the maximum loss and
is associated with a failed power management adjustment.
Note: The level Warning or Error is based on whether the

loss is just outside the PT range within 1 dB, or whether the
loss is outside of the PT range + 1 dB. However, if the adjust
succeeds the Error is changed to a Warning .
If the power management adjustment succeeded, this would be

a Warning instead of an error.
Error: Loss x.x dB too low
The measured loss is x.x dB lower than the minimum loss and
is associated with a failed power management adjustment.
If the power management adjustment succeeded, this would be
a Warning instead of an error.
Loss Accommodated.
The loss is outside the planned range, but the loss was
accommodated by the auto power management adjustment.
Average attenuation of x.x dB

applied to range
For a CWR8 thru, WSS thru or ROADM thru path x.x dB was
applied to the planned loss range. This equals the applied
attenuation of the optical device in the path.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-64
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-3
Notes field terms and definitions
(continued)
Note
Explanation
Power not found
No optical power was found that could be used to calculate a

loss.
Error: unable to read loss

value
A measured loss could not be calculated and a commissioning

loss was not available on the network element.
(Target gain = xx.x dB)
The adjustment function calculated a gain of xx.x dB which did

not fall within the planned gain range.
Loss within 10% of max
The measured loss is within 10% of the maximum planned

value. Several components within 10% of the max may cause
an auto power management adjustment to fail.
Upstream loss too high
The ingress adjustment has failed and the loss preceding the
ingress LD is too high.
x dB of y dB repair margin
consumed
Indicates that the ingress adjustment has set the gain of the
ingress LD within the repair margin allocated for this LD. The
gain is approaching the maximum gain planned for this
amplifier.
DCM present
Indicates that a dispersion compensation device is between the

two detect points used to calculate the loss.
Highlighting in the loss report
If errors or warnings are generated during commissioning or during an in-service power

adjustment, the relevant cells within the loss report are highlighted to help identify the
source of the problems. Warnings are highlighted yellow. Errors are highlighted red.
Highlighting is conditional on whether the report was generated during commissioning or
during an in-service operation, and based on the last adjust results for each NE.
In the following table, the rule applies for the combination of ingress line to egress line,
that is the egress line is on different degree of the node from the ingress line.
Table 6-4
Last ingress result
Last egress result
Highlighting
Success
Success
No highlighting applied to the loss

report.
Losses that are outside LPTMin to LPT
Max are noted as in the Notes field.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-65
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-4
(continued)
Last ingress result
Last egress result
Highlighting
Power adjust warning span repair margin

violated
Success
The ingress amp is highlighted yellow

with a Warning message. The
preceding span and other ingress
components may also be highlighted
yellow with a Warning message.
Although the ingress adjust has passed,
some of the span repair margin has
been used. In this case, the network
remains in a normal operating state.
Although no action is required, the
operator may choose to address the
warning.
Success
Anything other than

success
Warnings: Components or spans

highlighted in yellow with a Warning
message may indicate a potential
problem.
Anything other than

success
Success
The measured component or span loss

is less than the LPT Min or greater than
the LPT Max values, but is within the
measurement accuracy window. Before
attempting to fix the flagged warnings,
check for any components in the Error
state.
Anything other than

success
Anything other than

success
Errors: Components or spans

highlighted in red with an Error
message require attention. The
measured component or span loss is
less than the LPT Min or greater than the
LPT Max values, including
measurement accuracy. Amplifiers
highlighted in red with an Error
message indicate a problem area since
the gain setting required is outside of
the allowed range.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-66
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
The System Loss Report of the CPB tool displays the loss per channel through a network
element from ingress degree to egress degree. There are two-target applications for this
NE loss report. One use is to check the pad values selected during commissioning of the
FOADM network elements. The second use is to quickly audit a FOADM node in-service
to discover if any excess loss exists within the node if optical power out of range alarms
are observed on one or more channels.
Prerequisites
Prior to creating a System Loss Report, the user should complete provisioning of the EPT
parameters for the target system. If the system has been commissioned, this prerequisite is
met.
If these parameters are not provisioned, the System Loss Report will not display a target
loss range for the loop or express channels and the expected gain range for the LDs will
also be missing. The user must run the Provision System using plan wizard to provision
the required planning tool parameters prior to creating a System Loss Report. The
parameters in Table 6-5, Minimum EPT parameters for network element (p. 6-67) are
the minimum set of parameters that must be provisioned.
Table 6-5
Minimum EPT parameters for network element
EPT Commissioning
Parameter
Tag in planning tool

commissioning .xml file
Applicable Port
LD Gmin
AmpMinGain
LD Sig Out
LD Gmax
AmpMaxGain
LD Sig Out
Ingress LD target output power
TargetOutputPower
LD Sig Out
Ingress LD power deviation out
DeviationOut
LD Sig Out
Egress target output power
TargetOutputPower
LD Line Out
Egress power deviation out
DeviationOut
LD Line Out
Generating a loss report

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the CPB tool is not already running, start it by selecting Provision -> Launch CPB...
from the top menu and login using the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM login and password.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Commissioning -> Create System Loss Report (using plan)... from the top menu.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-67
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
An overview window will appear as shown in Figure 6-41, CPB Create system loss
report overview (p. 6-68). Click Next>.
Figure 6-41 CPB Create system loss report overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The planning tool file selection window is displayed as shown in Figure 6-42, CPB
Create system loss report select planning tool file (p. 6-68).
Figure 6-42 CPB Create system loss report select planning tool file
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-68
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Browse to the folder containing the EPT commissioning file for the target system and
select the file.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Next and the system loss report stages window displays as shown in Figure 6-43,
CPB Create system loss report stages progress window (p. 6-69).
Result: The last page appears as shown in Figure 6-44, CPB Create system loss
report last page (p. 6-70).

Figure 6-43 CPB Create system loss report stages progress window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-69
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wait until the stages show completed and click Next>.

Figure 6-44 CPB Create system loss report last page
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-70
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click View Report, and a loss report will be displayed similar to the one shown in Figure
6-45, CPB sample loss report (p. 6-71). Alternatively, click Download Report to save
the report to a selected location.
Figure 6-45 CPB sample loss report
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click Finish to close the create system loss report wizard.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Loss report content
The egress line selected by the user, and the result of the last power management
adjustment (applicable only to Auto managed lines) is displayed above the tables.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-71
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
One table per ingress line selected by the user is displayed next. The fields of the table are
explained in Table 6-6, Loss report fields (p. 6-72).
Table 6-6
Loss report fields
Field
Description
Path - Port from
The starting point for the measured loss.
Path - Port to
The end point for the measured loss. The measured loss is
between Port from to Port to.
Expected Loss Range - PT

Min Loss (Gain) dB
The minimum planned loss or gain between Port from and

Port to.
Expected Loss Range - PT

Max Loss (Gain) dB
The maximum planned loss or gain between Port from and

Port to.
Notes
Displays additional information. See The notes field of the

loss report (p. 6-73).
Measured Loss (dB)
The measured loss for each ITU channel provisioned between

the ingress line and egress line.
ITU <channel number>
There are three sections of the table. The first section is the Target Loss Comparison
section. In this section, the loss between the target power per channel at the ingress LD
Sig Out for the ingress line and the egress line LD Line Out is measured. The valid loss
range includes the expected power deviation from the target values.
The second section is the WTD detect point to detect point losses section. In this
section, each row contains the measured loss between two Wavelength Tracker detect
points.
The third section is the Per channel status. In this section, below each ITU channel
column, the status for each channel is reported.
If the loss is measured and in range the status is OK.

If the loss is measured and is too high the status is Too high.
If the loss is measured and is too low the status is Too low.
If the loss was not measured the status is n/a.
The PT Min Loss and PT Max Loss fields show n/a if the planned loss is not set on the
network element, or cannot be calculated, for WTD to WTD losses and the target loss
range, respectively.n/a indicatesnot available.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-72
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The notes field of the loss report
The notes field contains additional information.
Power not found - power readings were not available for one or more of the channels.
n/a is shown where the loss for the channel would normally be displayed.
Error: Unable to calculate target loss range - displayed when the planning tool data
required to calculate the target loss range is not available. See Table 6-6, Loss report
fields (p. 6-72) for the required planning tool data.
System report highlighting
If the measured loss reported is outside the planned range by less than or equal to 1 dB
the loss is highlighted yellow. If the measured loss is outside the planned range by more
than 1 dB the loss is highlighted red. If the measured loss is within the planned range the
loss is not highlighted. The WTD to WTD losses are not highlighted if the measured loss
in the Target Loss Comparison is not highlighted.
If a measured loss cannot be calculated no highlighting is applied to the measured loss. If
the planned or target loss range is not available no highlighting is applied.
Troubleshooting using the loss report
Losses that are highlighted Yellow indicate a potential problem. Losses that are
highlighted Red indicate a problem that should be corrected. For a path from an ingress
line that is Manually power managed to an egress line that is Manually power managed
on a FOADM node, the most likely problem is an incorrect pad selection for the optical
connection between the drop side and add side of the path. As removal of an attenuating
pad will break the optical path of the signal, attenuating pad changes should be done
during a maintenance time window.
During service turn-up, the loss report can be used as an aide to ensure that the selected
pad for the new service is correct. After adding the attenuating pad for the new service,
run the loss report to compare the measured loss for the channel to the target loss range.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-73
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
After the Commission Greenfield System wizard completes, a loss report is generated.
Refer to Understanding the loss report (p. 6-60) for more details about the loss report.
See Figure 6-45, CPB sample loss report (p. 6-71).
Above each node loss summary in the loss report, there is a box with Last ingress result =
<string> and Last egress result = <string> (see Figure 6-45, CPB sample loss report
(p. 6-71). If there is a failure on the NE, then the box is highlighted. Warnings are
highlighted yellow. Errors are highlighted red. This section provides a list of the possible
messages, along with a detailed description of the message and any corrective action
required.
Table 6-7, Loss report error messages (p. 6-74) provides a list of possible error
messages. Follow the applicable corrective action to troubleshoot the error.
Table 6-7
Message
Description
Corrective Action
Aborted
The power adjustment was

aborted by the user.
NA
This message applies to

in-service adjustments only.
Action not supported for that
location
The point selected is not a

power adjustment target point.
See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830

Photonic Service Switch
36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/
PSS-16) Release 6.0 User
Provisioning Guide for a list
of valid adjustment points.
Amplifier is gain limited

(ingress adjustment)
The amplifier output power is

at its maximum allowable
level and the gain has been
clamped.
Go to Troubleshoot amplifier
is gain limited (ingress
adjustment) (p. 6-80).
Amplifier is gain limited

(egress adjustment)
The amplifier output power is

at its maximum allowable
level and the gain has been
clamped.
is gain limited (egress
adjustment) (p. 6-80).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-74
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-7
(continued)
Message
Description
Corrective Action
Amplifier signal power

unavailable
The adjustment failed because

the NE was unable to retrieve
the signal power from the
corresponding ingress/egress
amplifier. This message
applies to Commission
Greenfield System wizard
triggered adjustments only.
signal power unavailable
(p. 6-81)).
No through services
provisioned
An adjustment cannot be
completed for the through
path of the network element
because no services are
provisioned or present. This
message is not considered a
failure. This message pertains
to in-service egress power
adjustments only.
Go to Troubleshoot no
through services provisioned
(p. 6-81).
Pack required for adjust not

present
A pack required to perform a

power adjustment is not
present.
Go to Troubleshoot pack
required for adjust not
present (p. 6-81).
Communication time-out with

upstream node
Communication with the

upstream node failed.
Go to Troubleshoot
communication time-out with
upstream node (p. 6-82).
Configuration request
unsuccessful
The software encountered an

internal error.
Go to Troubleshoot
configuration request
unsuccessful (p. 6-82).
Error
A general error has occurred.
Check for alarms and

troubleshoot.
Fiber is not yet commissioned
The commissioning flag for

the line where the adjustment
was triggered has not been set
to completed yet. This
message applies to in-service
adjustments only, triggered
directly by the user.
Go to Troubleshoot fiber is
not yet commissioned
(p. 6-83).
Local adjustment is still in

progress
A power adjustment is
currently in progress. This
message applies to in-service
adjustments only.
Wait for the adjustment to

complete.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-75
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-7
(continued)
Message
Description
Corrective Action
Power adjust failed - span

repair margin violated
The power adjustment failed

because the required gain falls
within the area designated for
the span splice margin.
Go to Troubleshoot loss too

high (ingress adjustment)
(p. 6-83).
Power adjust warning - splice

margin violated
Indicates that the ingress

amplifier gain encroaches on
the span repair margin.
Go to Troubleshoot power
adjust warning - splice margin
violated (p. 6-83).
Loss too high (ingress

adjustment)
The loss from the output of

the previous node to the
ingress amp on the current
node is greater than the
maximum allowable span loss
specified in the EPT
commissioning file. The loss
cannot be accommodated by
the gain limits for the ingress
amplifier planned by the EPT.

(p. 6-83).
In-service: The required gain

calculated by the adjustment
exceeds the planned
maximum gain plus a margin
over the maximum gain.
Triggered by Commission
Greenfield System wizard:
The required gain calculated
by the adjustment exceeds the
planned maximum gain.
Loss too high (egress
adjustment). The loss within
the node is too high.
The loss within the node is

too high.

high (egress adjustment)
(p. 6-84).
Loss too low (ingress

adjustment)
The loss from the output of

the previous node to the
ingress amp on the current
node is less than the minimum
allowable span loss specified
in the EPT commissioning
file. The loss cannot be
accommodated by the gain
limits of the ingress amplifier.

low (ingress adjustment)
(p. 6-85).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-76
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-7
(continued)
Message
Description
Corrective Action
Loss too low (egress

adjustment)
The loss within the node is

too low.

low (egress adjustment)
(p. 6-85).
Maximum number of
iterations reached
Maximum number of
adjustment iterations is
reached. The probable cause
is erratic power transient. This
message may appear for an
egress adjustment triggered at
a terminal line if the OT or
SVAC power setpoint cannot
be achieved. This message
applies to in-service power
adjustments only. This can
also occur if the OT line port
admin state is down.
Go to Troubleshoot
Maximum number of
iterations reached (p. 6-86).
No services in appropriate
state for adjustment
The services required to

perform an in-service power
adjustment are in a power
unstable state or the
Wavelength Tracker detect
point reporting powers has
been declared unreliable and
the power adjustment cannot
proceed. This message applies
to in-service power
adjustments only.
services in appropriate state
for adjustment (p. 6-86).
No through services in
appropriate state for
adjustment
The services required to

perform an in-service power
adjustment are in a power
unstable state or the
Wavelength Tracker detect
point reporting powers has
been declared unreliable and
the power adjustment cannot
proceed. This message applies
to in-service egress power
adjustments only.
through services in
appropriate state for
adjustment (p. 6-87).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-77
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-7
(continued)
Message
Description
Corrective Action
No services present
Impossible to complete
adjustment without services
provisioned. This message
applies to in service power
adjustments only.
services present (p. 6-87).
Power changing; cannot

adjust
The total or signal power

readings are not stable and the
power adjustment cannot
execute. This message applies
to adjustments triggered by
the Commission Greenfield
System wizard only.
Contact your next level of

support.
Power measurement is
unavailable
The power management

application failed to retrieve a
value from one of the line
packs.
Go to Troubleshoot power
measurement is unavailable
(p. 6-87).
Success
Adjustment completed
successfully. Loss
compensated within tolerance.
NA
Timeout caused adjust to halt
The power adjustment timed

out.
Go to Troubleshoot time-out
caused adjust to halt
(p. 6-88).
Topology provisioning is
incomplete
The NE fiber topology is not

fully defined.
Go to Troubleshoot topology
provisioning is incomplete
(p. 6-88).
Upstream data unavailable
Data from the upstream NEs

is unavailable.
Go to Troubleshoot
communication time-out with
upstream node (p. 6-82).
Upstream software
incompatible
The NE upstream of the node

where the ingress adjustment
was attempted is running an
incompatible software release.
Go to Troubleshoot upstream
software incompatible
(p. 6-88).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-78
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-7
(continued)
Message
Description
Corrective Action
Ingress amplifier gain exceeds

maximum planned gain
The adjustment set the gain of

the ingress LD above the
maximum planned gain, but
less than the maximum
planned gain plus margin.
This is not a failure, however
too many amplifiers in this
state will cause the OSNR of
services to be too low to
maintain error free
transmission. The network
operator should try to clear
this state as soon as possible.
This message applies to in
service ingress adjustments
only.

(p. 6-83).
Egress amplifier gain exceeds

maximum planned gain
The adjustment set the gain of

the egress LD above the
maximum planned gain, but
less than the maximum
planned gain plus margin.
This is not a failure, however
too many amplifiers in this
state will cause the OSNR of
services to be too low to
maintain error free
transmission. The network
operator should try to clear
this state as soon as possible.
This message applies to in
service egress adjustments
only.

high (egress adjustment)
(p. 6-84).
Amplifier mid-stage loss

problem
The adjustment cannot be

completed because the loss of
the amplifier mid-stage is out
of range.
mid-stage loss problem
(p. 6-89).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-79
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-7
(continued)
Message
Description
Corrective Action
Some add path control points

incomplete
The in-service egress

adjustment was unable to
completely adjust some of the
locally added channels for the
line at which the adjustment
was run.
Go to Troubleshoot add path

control points incomplete
(p. 6-89).
Adjustment using ASE not

possible - cross connect
provisioned
There is a cross-connect
provisioned on the line on
which the adjustment was
attempted. The power
adjustment cannot be
completed with this
cross-connect present.
Go to Troubleshoot
adjustment not possible cross-connect provisioned
(p. 6-90).
Troubleshoot amplifier is gain limited (ingress adjustment)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check the input power to the amplifier.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If it is abnormally high, this indicates a problem upstream. Correct the upstream problem.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot amplifier is gain limited (egress adjustment)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the problem is not traffic affecting, no action is required. This procedure is complete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check loss between the output of the amplifier and node output. Clean or replace
components as necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check for incorrect fibering that may have caused the input power to the amplifier to be
too high. Clean or replace components as necessary.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-80
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshoot amplifier signal power unavailable

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform a warm reset of the amplifier pack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rerun the commissioning wizard.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the fault persists, perform a cold reset of the amplifier pack by reseating the pack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the fault persists, replace the amplifier pack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot no through services provisioned

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provision at least one present wavelength on through path.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Retry adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot pack required for adjust not present

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the packs planned by the EPT for the WDM through path are present.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the packs planned by the EPT for the WDM through path are Admin up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check for any alarms related to the packs. Replace packs if necessary.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-81
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshoot communication time-out with upstream node

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the message is generated during the Commission Greenfield System wizard, rerun the
commissioning wizard.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the message is generated as a result of an in-service power adjustment, perform a power

adjustment on the affected span using the Adjust button in the PhM interface or use the
CLI or WebUI to perform an ingress power adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the fault persists, check that the OSC CN link between the nodes of the segment is up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshoot the CN link if necessary.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the message is generated during the Commission Greenfield System wizard, rerun the
commissioning wizard.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

adjustment on the affected span using the Adjust button in the PhM interface or use the
CLI or WebUI to perform an ingress power adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot configuration request unsuccessful

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check for alarms and troubleshoot following the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service
Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing
Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check for packs that reset during the adjustment. Try rerunning the adjustment if a pack
had reset during the adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-82
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshoot fiber is not yet commissioned

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If commissioning of the system has not been done yet, follow the commissioning
procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If commissioning of the system has been completed, set the commissioning flags of the
ingress LD Line ports to completed/true. This can be done by the user through the PhM
inventory view, CLI, or WebUI.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot power adjust warning - splice margin violated

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the message is generated as a result of an in-service power adjustment, no action is

required. This is not considered a failure, but it is a warning to the user that the amplifier
gain is approaching the maximum gain planned for the amplifier by the EPT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the message is generated during commissioning, troubleshoot the problem as described

in Troubleshoot loss too high (ingress adjustment) (p. 6-83).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot loss too high (ingress adjustment)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identify the source of the excess loss using the loss report (see Understanding the loss
report (p. 6-60)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the span loss is too high, perform the following substeps and retry the adjustment after
each step.
If not, go to Step 8 .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Clean the fiber connection between the patch panel and the LD Line In port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-83
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform an in-service adjustment from the PhM light path trace power management
interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the Loss too high error remains, check the loss on the affected segment and if the span
loss is too high field personnel will need to try to correct the span loss.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the Loss too high error remains, clean the fiber connection between the patch panel and
the LD Line Out port of the upstream network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the span loss cannot be reduced to meet the planned limit, then a replan of the system
will be required using the EPT.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the message is generated during ASE commissioning, rerun the commissioning wizard.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

adjustment on the affected span using the PhM, CLI, or WebUI.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot loss too high (egress adjustment)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identify the location on the NE of the excess loss using the loss report (see
Understanding the loss report (p. 6-60)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If loss is still too high, replace the pack (or packs) where the measured loss reported by
the loss report is closest to the maximum loss. Retry the adjustment, and repeat if
necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-84
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot loss too low (ingress adjustment)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify the span loss using the loss report.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The error may be caused by a fibering error on the ingress path of the NE. Check the
actual node fibering and compare with the planned fibering.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the fibering is incorrect on the NE, clean and refiber the NE as required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If span loss remains too low, check the loss on the affected segment. If it cannot be
corrected, a replan of the network using the EPT will be required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the message is generated during ASE commissioning, rerun the commissioning wizard
with the new EPT commissioning file.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the message is generated as a result of an in-service power adjustment, generate a new

EPT commissioning file and use it to rebalance the power using the PhM Power Balance
(Using Plan) function. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 1354 RM-PhM Photonic
Manager Release 9.1 EMS Reference Guide.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot loss too low (egress adjustment)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identify the location on the NE where the loss is too low using the loss report (see
Understanding the loss report (p. 6-60)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-85
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check the actual node fibering and compare with the planned fibering. If the fibering is
incorrect on the NE, clean and refiber the NE as required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot Maximum number of iterations reached

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check the admin status of the transponder ports used for commissioning and verify that
they are up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Observe wavelength tracker powers at the input of the ingress amplifier. Retry adjustment
if power is stable over a minute.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a terminal node configuration (a line that is not connected to other lines within the
same NE), check the power setpoint versus the maximum attainable for any add path
power control points. To check the OT or SVAC maximum attainable power and current
target power, use the PhM inventory view, CLI, or WebUI.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot no services in appropriate state for adjustment

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wait for 30 secs to allow any unstable services to stabilize and reattempt the power
adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check for alarms and troubleshoot to bring the services to a stable state.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-86
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For an ingress adjustment, verify that the WT power readings for all channels received at
the local line are also present and power in range at the upstream egress line. If any
channel powers are missing or power out of range at the upstream egress line,
troubleshoot the upstream line.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot no through services in appropriate state for adjustment

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wait for 30 secs to allow any unstable services to stabilize and reattempt the power
adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check for alarms and troubleshoot to bring the services to a stable state.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that Wavelength Tracker powers are visible at the detect points through the node
from ingress line(s) to the egress line the egress adjustment was triggered for. Use the
PhM light path trace, CLI, or WebUI to confirm the provisioned services are present.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot no services present

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Provision a service (must be completed).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Retry the power adjustment.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot power measurement is unavailable

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check for any pack missing alarms, as this failure will occur if a pack is not present.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reinsert the packs that are missing.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-87
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rerun the commissioning wizard if the adjustment was triggered by the Commission
Greenfield System wizard.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Retry the power adjustment at the failed adjustment point using the PhM, CLI, or WebUI
interface.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot time-out caused adjust to halt

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check that the NE is online and stable.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check that all packs are up and running (packs are not undergoing reset).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Retry the power adjustment.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot topology provisioning is incomplete

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Complete the fiber topology provisioning on the NE. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
Photonic Service Switch 36/32/16 (PSS-36/PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 6.0 User
Provisioning Guide.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot upstream software incompatible

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check the software version on the upstream node. Verify that it is the same version as the
other nodes in the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-88
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If necessary, perform a software upgrade on the upstream node.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot amplifier mid-stage loss problem

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the ingress adjustment failed, check and correct the mid-stage loss of the ingress LD.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the egress adjustment failed, check and correct the mid-stage loss of the egress LD.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
After correcting the mid-stage loss problem retry the adjustment.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the adjustment that failed was triggered by the Commission Greenfield System wizard,
rerun the commissioning wizard.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the adjustment that failed was triggered by the user manually, perform a power
adjustment using the PhM light path trace power management interface, CLI, or WebUI.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Troubleshoot add path control points incomplete

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Locate the line where the failure occurred using the loss report.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check to see if there are any alarms on the network element that affect channels that are
added at this line. If there are any such alarms, troubleshoot them and then reattempt the
egress adjustment. End procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If there are no alarms, check that the administrative state of all line side ports of active
add cross-connects are set to Admin Up. If necessary, correct the setting of any Down
ports to Up. Reattempt the egress adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-89
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshoot adjustment not possible - cross-connect provisioned

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identify the line supporting the cross-connect using the loss report.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Delete the cross-connect.

Important! Deleting a cross-connect is service affecting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If using the PhM Commission Greenfield System wizard, reattempt the adjustment
through another complete execution of the wizard. If using the WebUI, reattempt the
adjustment.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-90
Issue 1 June 2013
7erformance verification
P
testing and data retrieval
Overview
Purpose
The procedures in this chapter helps you perform final verification on the network after
commissioning is complete.
Contents
7-1

Purpose
Database backups are performed using TFTP server, which is provided with the
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager. This procedure helps you perform
database backups on all the NEs in the network. The steps are completed using the
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 1354 RM-PhM Photonic
Manager Release 9.1 EMS Reference Guide for more information.
The procedure assumes the Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM server is already connected to
the network, and all the NEs have been discovered. Commissioning must be complete.
Procedure
The following is the procedure to perform database backups.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-1
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Admin-> Settings from the top menu in the Topology View window. See Figure
7-1, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM settings menu (p. 7-2).
Figure 7-1 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM settings menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-2
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Settings window, select System Settings from the top tab and FTP subtab as
shown in Figure 7-2, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM file transfer window (p. 7-3).
Figure 7-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM file transfer window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the root directory is /tftp files in the TFTP Root Directory dialogue box and
select FTP option in Preferred protocal for NE Backup, NE Software Upgrade, and
PM: field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Remove Prefix option button.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-3
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the NE you want to back up in the Topology View window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select Maintenance -> NE Database Backup & Restore from the top menu bar as shown
in Figure 7-3, Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup menu (p. 7-4).
Figure 7-3 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup menu
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click OK and theNE backup & Restore window opens as shown in Figure 7-4,
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup (p. 7-4).
Figure 7-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-4
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on the NE and select Details... from the menu as shown in Figure 7-5,
Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup details menu (p. 7-5).
Figure 7-5 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup details menu
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
In the Backup Properties window, check both Use the EMS Server as Backup host
recommended and Use default backup directory recommended.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
Ensure that the NE is selected in the list and click the Backup selected NE(s) icon as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 7-6 Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM NE backup icon
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
The backup progress is displayed in the bottom half of the Backup & Restore window.
Wait for the Backup Success message.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Verify the database backup file is present in the PhM server PC. The path is
C:/tftpfiles/nebackup/ <filename>.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-5
Issue 1 June 2013
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Where <filename> has the format <NEname>_<release descriptor>_<backup

date>_<backup time >.bak
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
Are there additional NEs that have not been backed up?
If yes, go back to Step 6 .
If no, this procedure is complete.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-6
Issue 1 June 2013
Appendix A: Fiber cleaning
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes the Alcatel-Lucent recommended method for the cleaning and
inspection of optical connectors using specific tools and materials that have been proven
to be effective in the assembly and testing of optical transmission equipment. It is critical
that the connector endfaces, optical ports, and bulkheads are clean and free from
particular contamination to assure proper performance and reliability of lightwave
systems. With the modern high speed, high power, and wider bandwidth optical
transmission systems, clean connectors along the optical path are absolutely essential for
successful operation.
Before making any optical connections, perform the Inspect, Clean, Inspect, Connect
(ICIC) process on every jumper connector endface, optical port, and optical bulkhead.
Note: The information in this appendix is applicable to all Alcatel-Lucent optical
products, not just Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS). There may be
tools and connector types listed that are not applicable to Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-32/PSS-16.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-1
Issue 1 June 2013
Fiber cleaning
Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety instructions
DANGER
Laser hazard
Never view an energized optical cable with the naked eye or with an optical magnifying
instrument. Disconnected or separated optical connectors may emit invisible laser
radiation and direct exposure can severely injure the eye. If inspecting the endface of a
connector with a fiberscope, be absolutely certain that the system is deactivated.
DANGER
Noxious-substance hazard
Alcohol is flammable and is harmful if swallowed, inhaled or absorbed through the skin.
Keep alcohol away from heat, sparks, or flame. Avoid contact with eyes, skin and
clothing.
Contents
Cleaning optical connectors
A-3
Inspecting optical connectors
A-6
Cleaning other optical components
A-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-2
Issue 1 June 2013
Fiber cleaning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Materials and tools
For proper cleaning, the equipment and materials in the following table are
recommended:
Table A-1
Product
Model
Comcode
ITE #
Installation
Order #
Optical Fiber
Scope
Noyes OFS
300-200X
408463636
ITE-7129
33712900
2.5 mm Universal
adapter Cap
For use with the

Noyes OFS
300-200X
408197044
ITE-7129D1
33712901
1.25 mm
Universal
Adapter Cap
For use with the

Noyes OFS
300-200X
408197069
ITE-7129D2
33712902
Video Fiber
Scope*
Noyes VFS-
408356830
ITE-7146
4171600
1.25 mm Adapter
For VFS-1
408356848
ITE-7146D1
33714601
2.5 mm Adapter
For VFS-1
408356855
ITE-7146D2
33714602
FC Adapter
For VFS-1
408356863
ITE-7146D3
33714603
LC Adapter
For VFS-1
408356889
ITE-7146D4
33714604
SC Adapter
For VFS-1
408356954
ITE-7146D5
33714605
ST Adapter
For VFS-1
408356962
ITE-7146D6
33714606
Individual
Pre-Saturated
Alcohol Wipes
99% Pure
Isopropyl Alcohol
901375147
ITE-7136
33713600
CLETOP
Cleaning Cassette
Type A Reel
901375154
ITE-7137
33713700
CLETOP
Cleaning Cassette
Replacement
Reel
Type A Reel
901375014
ITE-7137 D1
33713701
Luminex Stick
Port Cleaners
1.25 mm
901375030
ITE-7134
33713400
Luminex Stick
Port Cleaners
2.5 mm
901375022
ITE-7135
33713500
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-3
Issue 1 June 2013
Fiber cleaning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-1
(continued)
Product
Model
Comcode
ITE #
Installation
Order #
Luminex Cloth
5.5 x 5.5
408201226
R6033
23603300
Note: The equipment and material previously listed has been tested and is proven
effective when used in conjunction with this procedure. Substitution of equipment or
materials is at the discretion of the user and is not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent.
Fiber cleaning considerations
Observe the following precautions when handling fibers to prevent contaminates from
adhering to the fibers and creating potential errors and unnecessary losses:
Assume that all fibers are dirty and must be inspected and cleaned before connection
to equipment.
Always inspect fibers for contaminants and clean where required.
Do not remove the protective end caps on fibers or fiber ports until ready to connect.
If it is suspected that a fiber or port was contaminated during test or turn up
procedures, reinspect and clean as necessary.
Cleaning process
The following cleaning procedure is acceptable for field service/installation activities:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the dust cap from the connector ferrule exposing the connector end-face.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open an individual foil packet of a pre-saturated isopropyl alcohol (99% pure) wipe.
Grasp the connector housing and place the connector ferrule end-face perpendicular to the
alcohol wipe.
Drag it against the wipe three times in a figure 8 pattern. This action applies the alcohol
solvent to the end-face and initially loosens and scrubs away organic/solid contaminates.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If a CLETOP cassette cleaner is not available, proceed with Step 7. Otherwise, hold the
CLETOP cassette cleaner in the palm of your hand with the cassette shutter door facing
up.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-4
Issue 1 June 2013
Fiber cleaning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rotate the cassette lever all the way down with your thumb. Do not release the lever. The
lever advances the dry Luminex cleaning cloth inside the case and simultaneously
opens the shutter. The CLETOP cassette shutter door is now open and ready for cleaning
the connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Insert and press the connector ferrule end-face perpendicular against the cleaning cloth in
the first of two slots of the cleaner.
Drag it down in the direction indicated by the arrows on the cleaner. Do not release the
lever of the cassette.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Lift the connector from the first slot and rotate it 90 degrees and repeat the wiping
procedure using the second slot. Be sure that the ferrule is pressed snug against the
cleaning cloth while dragging the ferrule to assure the proper cleaning action.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Release the cassette lever allowing the shutter door to close to its initial position.
Continue with Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Wrap a Luminex cleaning cloth around the ferrule and rotate the connector housing,
cleaning the outside periphery of ferrule.
Follow this by folding an unused portion of the cloth over the end of the ferrule end-face
and then with light pressure from the thumb, slightly drag the cloth from the center of the
ferrule to the edge while rotating the connector 360 degrees. If the Luminex cleaning
cloth is not available, a lint-free clean room optic wipe can be used. The Luminex
cleaning cloth is washable and can be used multiple times. The optic wipes are single use
and disposable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Inspect the connector for cleanliness. If necessary, repeat the cleaning process.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-5
Issue 1 June 2013
Fiber cleaning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connector inspection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the instructions in the manual provided with the Optical Fiber Scope to view the
ferrule end-face of the fiber under inspection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The visual area of the ferrule end-face (ferrule and fiber) as observed by the inspection
system/scope should be free of any contaminates. Repeat the Cleaning Procedure if the
fiber end-face does not meet the following requirements:
Requirement:
No fixed type of contamination (contaminates that remain at the same location after three
wet-dry cleaning cycles), regardless of size, is allowed in the restricted area of the glass
fiber end-face.
Note: The restricted area is defined as ~66 micron () diameter for both single mode
and multi-mode fibers.
Requirement:
No chips, cracks, or scratches are allowed near the core of the glass fiber end-face.
Requirement:
No large floating (loose) contaminates are allowed on the glass fiber and ceramic ferrule
end-face.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
After the connector has been verified to be cleaned, it is immediately inserted into the
adapter buildout of the optical component. This assures maximum cleanliness and
effectiveness of the connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the cleaned connector cannot be connectorized with a corresponding adapter, the

connector ferrule must be protected with a connector dust cap. Before placing the cap on
the ferrule, ensure that the cap is clean. This can be accomplished by inserting a CLETOP
stick cleaner (swab) of the same inside diameter as the cap (either 2.5 mm or 1.25 mm)
and rotate the stick 360 degrees three times. Following this procedure, carefully place the
cap over the ferrule. When the cleaned connector is ready for assembly, it should be
reinspected for cleanliness prior to connectorization.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-6
Issue 1 June 2013
Fiber cleaning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Fiber adapters or circuit pack connectors
During testing and/or troubleshooting activities, it is necessary to clean the optical

buildout adapter or the circuit pack connector. The following procedure is recommended.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the appropriate CLETOP stick cleaner (2.5 mm for SC, ST, and FC connectors,
1.25 mm for LC connectors) dampen the stick cleaner with Ethyl alcohol using the
alcohol wipe. Insert the stick cleaner into the adapter rotating the stick 360 degrees while
inserting. Push/rotate the stick until the stick cleaner is in contact with the connector.
Apply slight pressure upon contact and rotate the stick 360 degrees at least three times.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the stick cleaner, rotating it upon removal.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using a dry CLETOP stick cleaner of appropriate diameter, repeat Step 1. This procedure
cleans the side walls of the adapter and the end-face of the circuit pack connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Gently insert the Video Fiber Scope probe into the port until the fiber ferrule comes into
view.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the fiber ferrule is clean. Repeat the process in Steps 1 - 3 if the fiber does not
meet the requirements specified in Inspecting optical connectors (p. A-6)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-7
Issue 1 June 2013
Fiber cleaning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-8
Issue 1 June 2013
Appendix B: Tightening torque
Overview
Purpose
The listed tightening torque values are to be used for all fasteners on the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS). The tolerance admitted on the nominal values is
10%.
Contents
Nominal tightening torques
B-1

Description
The tolerance admitted on the nominal values is 10%.

Table B-1
Screw
Size
Captive screw
General screw
Self-forming screw
N-m
in-lb
N-m
in-lb
N-m
in-lb
M2
0.13
1.15
0.26
2.30
0.30
2.66
M2.5
0.28
2.48
0.53
4.63
0.60
5.26
M3
0.48
4.25
0.92
8.15
1.10
9.74
M4
1.10
9.74
2.10
18.60
2.50
22.14
M5
2.15
19.04
4.00
35.43
4.90
43.40
M6
3.80
33.65
6.90
61.11
10.80
95.65
M8
9.30
82.36
17.60
155.87
25.50
225.84
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-1
Issue 1 June 2013
Tightening torque
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table B-1
(continued)
Screw
Size
Captive screw
General screw
Self-forming screw
N-m
in-lb
N-m
in-lb
N-m
in-lb
M10
18.50
163.85
30.50
270.13
48.00
425.12
M12
31.40
278.10
59.80
529.63
84.00
743.96
12-24
NA
NA
NA
NA
3.75
34
Table B-2
Nominal tightening torques when using washers
Screw
Size
Captive screw
General screw
Self-forming screw
N-m
in-lb
N-m
in-lb
N-m
in-lb
M2
0.14
1.24
0.28
2.48
0.32
2.83
M2.5
0.29
2.57
0.58
5.14
0.68
6.02
M3
0.55
4.87
1.00
8.85
1.20
10.63
M4
1.20
10.63
2.30
20.37
2.80
24.80
M5
2.40
21.25
4.50
39.85
5.40
47.82
M6
4.20
37.20
7.60
67.31
11.90
105.40
M8
10.20
90.34
19.40
171.82
28.00
247.99
M10
20.30
179.80
33.55
297.14
52.80
467.63
M12
34.50
305.55
65.80
582.77
92.70
821.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B-2
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
access identifier (AID)
A unique identifier used to address equipment slots and ports, as well as facility tributaries, that
are defined for the system architecture.
add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing (ADM)
A high-speed multiplexing function offered by SONET that allows lower-level signals to be added
to or dropped from an optical carrier channel. The connection to the add/drop multiplexer is
through a tributary channel at a lower SONET carrier rate or a specific digital speed (for example,
DS3 or DS1).
ADM
See add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing (p. GL-1) for definition.

AHPHG
High Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See ALPHG (p. GL-2) for related term.
AID
See access identifier (p. GL-1) for definition.

AIM
See alarm indication message (p. GL-1) for definition.

AINS
Automatic in-service.
AIS
See alarm indication signal (p. GL-1) for definition.

alarm
External notification or display of a failure condition. The indication of failure is towards an

external system interface or through audible or visible indicators.
alarm indication message (AIM)
A return message sent from one network element (NE) to another NE that indicates it has received
a signal that is so degraded that it is raising an alarm.
alarm indication signal (AIS)
A signal sent downstream by an NE to indicate that its incoming signal has failed.
alarm list
A status report that lists active alarms on the NE.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-1
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
alarm log
A history of setting and clearing system alarms on the NE.

alarm severity
An attribute that defines the priority of the alarm message. The method in which alarms are
processed depends on their severity.
ALPHG
Low Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See AHPHG (p. GL-1) for related term.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
A United States standards body that accredits standards for programming languages,
communications, and networking. ANSI is the U.S. representative in the International
Organization for Standards (ISO).
amplified spontaneous emission (ASE)
Optical noise generated in an erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) with and without signal input
power.
ANSI
See American National Standards Institute (p. GL-2) for definition.

APD
See avalanche photodiode (p. GL-3) for definition.

APS
See automatic protection switching (p. GL-3) for definition.

APSD
See automatic power shutdown (p. GL-3) for definition.

ASE
See amplified spontaneous emission (p. GL-2) for definition.

asynchronous
Data that is transmitted without an associated clock signal.

asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)
A fast-packet, connection-oriented, cell-switching technology for broadband signals. ATM is

designed to accommodate any form of data, including voice, facsimile, computer data, video,
image, and multimedia, whether compressed or uncompressed, whether real-time or non-real-time
in nature, and with guaranteed quality of service (QoS).
ATM networks will accept or reject connections based on a user's average and peak bandwidth
requirements, providing flexible and efficient service for LAN-to-LAN, compressed video, and
other applications that involve variable bit rate (VBR) traffic.
ATM
See asynchronous transfer mode (p. GL-2) for definition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-2
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
attenuation
The decrease in signal strength along a fiber optic waveguide caused by absorption and scattering.
Attenuation is usually expressed as dB/km.
attenuator
A passive device that reduces the amplitude of a signal without distorting the waveform.
automatic power shutdown (APSD)
A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of optical amplifiers to

avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic protection switching (APS)
A network survivability method in which traffic is automatically switched to a protection route

when a failure is detected on a working route.
autonomous message
Message sent by the system to the CIT to notify it of any state change in the system. Autonomous
messages are not responses to a CIT-initiated command. Examples of these messages include
alarms, events (non-alarmed condition), notification of connections that are added or deleted, and
changes in the system database.
avalanche photodiode (APD)
A photodetector that can be regarded as the semiconductor analog to photomultipliers. By

applying a high reverse bias voltage (typically 100-200 V in silicon), an APD shows an internal
current gain effect (around 100) due to impact ionization (avalanche effect).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
back reflection
See Fresnel reflection (p. GL-12).

background block errors (BBE)
Errors identified through OTN performance monitoring.

backward defect indication (BDI)
The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the ODUk Path layer. This defect
indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected condition that is treated as Server Signal Failure.
band optical filter (BOF)
A band-dependent optical card.

bay
An aluminum steel enclosure for rack-mounted equipment. Also know as a rack.

BB
See broadband (p. GL-4) for definition.

BBA
See broadband amplifier (p. GL-4) for definition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-3
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BBE
See background block errors (p. GL-3) for definition.

BDI
See backward defect indication (p. GL-3) for definition.

BER
See bit error rate (p. GL-4) for definition.

bidirectional line switched ring (BLSR)
A survivable SONET transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node failures by
providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. Network elements are
interconnected in a closed fiber loop (four fibers for a four-fiber BLSR architecture or two fibers
for a two-fiber BLSR). A service can reach its destination by traveling in either direction around
the ring. Exactly one-half of the bandwidth available between adjacent nodes in each direction is
used for working traffic, with the remaining bandwidth available for protection.
bit error rate (BER)
BER measures how accurately a bitstream is transmitted through a system. It measures how many
bits are received in error, compared to how many bits are sent.
BLSR
See bidirectional line switched ring (p. GL-4) for definition.

BOF
See band optical filter (p. GL-3) for definition.

broadband (BB)
A technology that refers to the always-open gateway to Internet-connected services delivered at

lightning-fast speeds.
broadband amplifier (BBA)
Optical amplifier that supports broadband technology.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CAD
See channel add/drop card (p. GL-5) for definition.

central office (CO)
A CO can be a building, a switch, or collection of switches where subscriber lines are joined to
switching equipment that connects the subscribers to each other, other subscribers, and/or long
distance subscribers.
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-4
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
channel
A communications path or the signal sent over that path.

channel add/drop card (CAD)
Used with automatic power management; allows setpoints for a manual transmission line.
channel optical filter (COF)
COF cards facilitate the WaveKey encoding function, employed at service endpoints.
chromatic dispersion
The effect describing the velocity dependence of light travelling through a medium, depending on
its wavelength. For optical telecommunication signals, this effect causes the light pulses to spread
out and the resulting distortion in pulse shape degrades the signal quality.
CIDR
See classless inter-domain routing (p. GL-5) for definition.

CIT
See craft interface terminal (p. GL-6) for definition.

cladding
Material that surrounds the core of an optical fiber that has a lower index of refraction compared
to that of the core. The lower index of refraction causes the transmitted light to travel down the
core.
classless inter-domain routing (CIDR)
Routing for networks of variable sizes, defined by a variable-length subnet mask. By using subnet
mask values other than 255 (all ones) for a particular octet, the bits in the network address that are
not 'covered' by the subnet mask can be sized to create networks that do not conform to the
original Class A, B, and C subnet definitions.
CLEI
See common language element identifier (p. GL-6) for definition.

CN
See control network (p. GL-6) for definition.

CO
See central office (p. GL-4) for definition.

coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM)
CWDM is the method of combining multiple signals on laser beams at various wavelengths for
transmission along fiber optic cables. The number of channels is fewer than in dense wavelength
division multiplexing (DWDM), but more than in standard wavelength division multiplexing
(WDM).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-5
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
COF
See channel optical filter (p. GL-5) for definition.

common language element identifier (CLEI)
CLEI codes enable you to clearly and consistently identify and track virtually every type of
telecommunications equipment. In the United States, these codes are assigned by Telecordia, and
are 10 bytes long.
connector
A mechanical or optical device that provides a demountable connection between two fibers or a
fiber and a source or detector.
connector variation
The maximum value in dB of the difference in insertion loss between mating optical connectors
(for example, with re-mating and temperature cycling). Also called optical connector variation.
control network (CN)
The portion of the network that carries control and management traffic (for example,
communications between the NEs and between the NEs and the EMS). The control network does
not carry user traffic. The control communications use the SNMP protocol.
core
The central portion of the fiber that transmits light. It is composed of material with a higher index
of refraction than the cladding.
coupler
An optical device that combines or splits power from optical fibers.

coupling ratio/loss (CR)
The ratio/loss of optical power from one output port to the total output power, expressed as a
percentage.
CPE
See customer premises equipment (p. GL-6) for definition.

CR
See coupling ratio/loss (p. GL-6) for definition.

craft interface terminal (CIT)
A local interface between humans and a NE. It is used to issue commands to the local system or,
by way of a remote login, to another system on the same fiber as the local system.
customer premises equipment (CPE)
Terminal and associated equipment and inside wiring located at a subscriber's premises. The
equipment is connected with the carrier's communication network at the demarcation point.
CWDM
See coarse wavelength division multiplexing (p. GL-5) for definition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-6
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
data communication network (DCN)
DCN supports communications between network elements (NEs) and the network management
system (NMS).
DCM
See dispersion compensation module (p. GL-7) for definition.

DCN
See data communication network (p. GL-7) for definition.

dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)
A multiplexing technique that uses close spectral spacing of individual optical carrier wavelengths
to reduce the total number of fibers needed to provide a given amount of information-carrying
capacity. The technique takes advantage of desirable transmission characteristics (for example,
minimum dispersion or attenuation) within a given fiber.
DGEF
See dynamic gain equalization filter (p. GL-7) for definition.

DHCP
See dynamic host configuration protocol (p. GL-7) for definition.

dispersion
The temporal spreading of a light signal in an optical waveguide caused by light signals traveling
at different speeds through a fiber either due to modal or chromatic effects.
dispersion compensation module (DCM)
Spooled fiber used to control excess dispersion found in certain fiber types at pre- and
post-amplification.
distortion
The difference in value between two measurements of a signal (transmitted and received).
DS3
Standard for digital transmission (American National Standard for telecommunications Carrier-to-Customer Installation - DS3 Metallic Interface, ANSI T1.404- 1989).
DWDM
See dense wavelength division multiplexing (p. GL-7) for definition.

dynamic gain equalization filter (DGEF)
A filter that equalizes the gain of an optical signal.

dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP)
DHCP allows a DHCP server to automatically assign an IP address to a computer's TCP/IP stack
software. The number is taken from a defined range of numbers for a given network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-7
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
earth
The European term for electrical ground.

EC
See equipment controller (p. GL-9) for definition.

EDFA
See erbium-doped fiber amplifier (p. GL-9) for definition.

edge node
A node that connects to external network or customer equipment, as opposed to providing an

interconnection point between other nodes. It is located at the "edge" of the network.
egress
Traffic leaving a network

EIA
See Electronic Industries Alliance (p. GL-8) for definition.

electrical variable optical attentuator (eVOA)
Works with the Tap module to provide input for Wavelength Tracker modulation and provides
optical tap for feedback signal to the Wavelength Tracker.
electromagnetic capability (EMC)
EMC is the ability of a device or system to function without error in its intended electromagnetic
environment
electromagnetic interference (EMI)
EMI refers to the emissions (high-energy, electrically induced magnetic fields) from a device or
system that interfere with the normal operation of another device or system.
Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)
Group that specifies electrical transmission standards. The EIA and TIA have developed
numerous well-known communications standards, including EIA/TIA-232 and EIA/TIA-449.
electrostatic discharge (ESD)
Static electrical energy potentially harmful to circuit packs and humans.

Element Management System (EMS)
The EMS provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a network,
including creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It includes interfaces
to external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement
(SLA) management.
EMC
See electromagnetic capability (p. GL-8) for definition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-8
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EMI
See electromagnetic interference (p. GL-8) for definition.

EMS
See Element Management System (p. GL-8) for definition.

EN
European Norm; a German acronym that stands for Europasche Norm.

Engineering rules
A set of rules that determine the system configuration possibilities based on fiber type, OA, rate,
and number of wavelengths. These rules also determine the maximum loss per span that can be
tolerated, the maximum distance between spans allowed, and the maximum number of spans that
can be supported.
equipment controller (EC)
EC is the equipment controller card, in a chassis with replaceable controllers, or it is the

integrated control hardware in a PSS-1.
erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA)
A type of amplifier with a short length of fiber that has been doped with erbium and spliced into
the operating single-mode fiber (SMF) . A three-port wavelength division multiplexer (WDM) is
used, with one incoming port connected to the operating fiber carrying the primary signal in the
1550-nm window, one incoming port attached to a pump laser operating at 980 nm or 1480 nm,
and the one outgoing port connected to the operating fiber.
ESD
See electrostatic discharge (p. GL-8) for definition.

Ethernet LAN
A LAN conformant to the 802.3 IEEE standard. This standard supports communications over
shared media where only one device can transmit while all other devices listen. A collision
detection and handling mechanism is incorporated into the standard. Devices on the LAN
communicate by sending Ethernet packets containing a Media Access Control (MAC) address for
the source and destination. Setting the destination MAC address to all ones supports packet
broadcast to all devices on the LAN.
ETSI
See European Telecommunications Standards Institute (p. GL-9) for definition.

European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)
Located in Sophia-Antipolis, France, ETSI is the European counterpart to ANSI. Its task is to
pave the way for telecommunications integration in the European community as part of the single
European market program. It establishes telecommunication standards for the European
community.
eVOA
See electrical variable optical attentuator (p. GL-8) for definition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-9
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
failure
Occurs when a fault cause persists for a certain period of time.

failure in time (FIT)
A unit of failure rate in reliability analysis. One FIT is equivalent to one failure per one billion
operating hours.
failure rate
The number of failures of a device per unit of time.

FC
See fiber optic connector (p. GL-10) for definition.

FC
See Federal Communications Commission (p. GL-10) for definition.

FCS
See frame check sequence (p. GL-12) for definition.

FDA
See Food and Drug Administration (p. GL-11) for definition.

FDDI
See fiber distributed data interface (p. GL-10) for definition.

FDI
See forward defect indicator (p. GL-11) for definition.

FEC
See forward error correction (p. GL-11) for definition.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
The U.S. federal regulatory agency responsible for the regulation of interstate and international
communications by radio, television, wire, satellite, and cable.
Ferrule
A rigid tube that confines or holds a fiber as part of a connector assembly.

fiber distributed data interface (FDDI)
A set of ANSI protocols used for sending digital data over fiber optic cable. FDDI networks are
token-passing networks and support data rates of up to 100 Mbps.
fiber optic cable
A cable containing one or more optical fibers.

fiber optic connector (FC)
A threaded optical connector for single-mode or multimode fiber and applications requiring low
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-10
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
back reflection.
field-programmable gate array (FPGA)
General purpose integrated chip; chip's functions can be programmed by software. FPGAs are
mostly used for rapid development and small or medium quantities production.
file transfer protocol (FTP)
A protocol used for exchanging files over the Internet. FTP uses the Internet's TCP/IP protocols to
enable data transfer. FTP is most commonly used to download/upload a file to/from a server using
the Internet.
FIT
See failure in time (p. GL-10) for definition.

FIT rate
The number of device failures in one billion device hours.

flash disk memory module (FMM)
A nonvolatile memory device used to store the installation software generic or the NE database.
flow
Usually refers to the movement of packets within the network (that is, packet flow).
FMM
See flash disk memory module (p. GL-11) for definition.

FOADM
Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing.

Food and Drug Administration (FDA)
An agency of the United States Department of Health and Human Services and is responsible for
the safety regulation of most types of foods, dietary supplements, drugs, vaccines, biological
medical products, blood products, medical devices, radiation-emitting devices, veterinary
products, and cosmetics.
forward defect indicator (FDI)
An automatic and fully distributed capability which indicates a failure in a server networking
layer (e.g., Physical Layer). When used with other mechanisms such as CV (Connectivity
Verification), it can indicate defects such as misbranching of LSPs and errors in swapping LSP
label.
forward error correction (FEC)
A technique used for error detection and correction in which the transmitting host computer
includes some number of redundant bits in the payload (data field) of a block or frame of data.
The receiving device uses those bits to detect, isolate and correct any errors created in
transmission. FEC avoids having to retransmit information which incurred errors in network
transit.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-11
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FPGA
See field-programmable gate array (p. GL-11) for definition.

frame check sequence (FCS)
Extra characters added to a frame for error control purposes. Used in HDLC, Frame Relay, and
other data link layer protocols.
Fresnel reflection
A reflection of light that occurs at the air-glass interface at the ends of an optical fiber. See back
reflection (p. GL-3) for related term.
FTP
See file transfer protocol (p. GL-11) for definition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
gain
The increase in power and magnitude of a signal.

gateway network element (GNE)
A system node that has a physical attachment to the management system to support the access of
the remote NE. The number of remote NEs a GNE can serve is specified in terms of the number
of OSI stack associations that the GNE can support without running out of local resources.
GbE
See Gigabit Ethernet (p. GL-12) for definition.

Gbps
Giga bits per second

generic framing protocol (GFP)
Provides a generic mechanism to adapt traffic from higher-layer client signals over an
octet-synchronous transport network. Client signals may be PDU oriented (e.g., PPP/IP or
Ethernet MAC), block oriented (e.g., Fiber Channel or ESCON) or a Constant Bit Rate (CBR)
stream.
GFP
See generic framing protocol (p. GL-12) for definition.

Gigabit Ethernet (GBE)
A transmission technology based on the Ethernet frame format and protocol used in local area
networks (LANs) that provides a data rate of one billion bits (one gigabit) per second. Gigabit
Ethernet is defined in the IEEE 802.3 standard and is currently used as the backbone in many
enterprise networks.
glass through-connection
A pair of optical connections between two segments that terminate on the same site.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-12
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GMPLS
Generalized Multi-Protocol Label-Switching

GMRE
GMPLS Routing Engine

GNE
See gateway network element (p. GL-12) for definition.

graphical user interface (GUI)
A program interface that takes advantage of the computer's graphics capabilities to make the
program easier to use.
grooming
Consolidating or segregating traffic.

grooming node
A node on which incoming signals of lower rates are added (or aggregated) into a higher-rate
signal for more efficient transport.
ground
The North American term for electrical earth.

GUI
See graphical user interface (p. GL-13) for definition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ILA
See in-line amplifier (p. GL-13) for definition.

in-line amplifier (ILA)
A repeater used in WDM technology. See repeater (p. GL-24) for related term.
ingress
Traffic entering a network.

insertion loss
The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector or splice, into a
previously continuous path.
International Standards Organization (ISO)
A United Nations agency concerned with international standardization in a broad range of

industrial and technical fields.
International Telecommunications Union (ITU)
An international civil organization established to promote standardized telecommunications on a

worldwide basis.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-13
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Internet protocol (IP)
A standard protocol designed for use in interconnected systems of packet-switched computer

communication networks. The Internet Protocol provides for transmitting blocks of data called
datagrams from sources to destinations, where sources and destinations are hosts identified by
fixed-length addresses. The Internet Protocol also provides for fragmentation and reassembly of
long datagrams, if necessary, for transmission through small-packet networks.
Internet protocol security (IPsec)
A developing standard for security at the network or packet processing layer of network
communication. Earlier security approaches have inserted security at the application layer of the
communications model. IPsec is especially useful for implementing virtual private networks and
for remote user access through dial-up connection to private networks.
Internet service provider (ISP)
A company that provides individuals and other companies access to the Internet and other related
services, such as Web site building and virtual hosting.
IP
See Internet protocol (p. GL-13) for definition.

IPsec (Internet Protocol Security)
See Internet protocol security (p. GL-14) for definition.

ISO
See International Standards Organization (p. GL-13) for definition.

ISP
See Internet service provider (p. GL-14) for definition.

ITU
See International Telecommunications Union (p. GL-13) for definition

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
jacket
The outer, protective covering of the cable.

jitter
Small and rapid variations in the timing of a waveform due to noise, changes in component
characteristics, supply voltages, or imperfect synchronizing circuits.
jumper
A short fiber optic cable with connectors on both ends.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lambda ()
The eleventh letter in the Greek alphabet. In optical fiber networking, the term lambda refers to an
individual optical wavelength. See wavelength (p. GL-32) for related term.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-14
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
laser bias current (LBC)
Current that runs through the laser to make it work. LBC is monitored by performance
monitoring. If the current goes beyond a certain threshold, the circuit pack must be replaced.
LBC
See laser bias current (p. GL-14) for definition.

LBO
See line build out (p. GL-15) for definition.

LC
See Lucent connector (p. GL-16) for definition.

LD
See line driver (p. GL-15) for definition.

LGX
A SONET device that contains ports for optical fiber connections to an optical network element
(NE). An LGX is used to make and change connections to an NE without changing the cabling on
the NE itself.
line build out (LBO)
Attenuation used to simulate a load.

line driver (LD)
An amplifier used to improve the strength of a signal at its source by driving the input of the
transmission line with an amplified signal.
link state advertisement (LSA)
A broadcast message that advertises a link's current status.

LOF
See loss of frame (p. GL-15) for definition.

long reach (LR)
An optic standard that constrains the output power of transmitters and the sensitivity of receivers
for long-haul applications (up to 80 km) without the need for regeneration.
LOS
See loss of service/loss of signal (p. GL-15) for definition.

loss
The amount of a signal's power, expressed in dB, that is lost in connectors, splices, or fiber
defects.
loss of frame (LOF)
Loss of frame is detected when the OOF (out-of-frame) anomaly persists for a certain time.
loss of service/loss of signal (LOS)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-15
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A condition where the optical input power falls below a certain threshold.
LR
See long reach (p. GL-15) for definition.

LSA
See link state advertisement (p. GL-15) for definition.

Lucent connector (LC)
Designation for a small-form-factor (SFF) design based on a proven 1.25-mm ceramic ferrule.
This connector uses RJ-style latching. It facilitates high-speed applications with lower power
requirements due to lower insertion loss (0.1 dB typical) and higher return loss (55-dB single
mode).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MAC
See media access control (p. GL-16) for definition.

management information base (MIB)
A formal description of a set of network objects that can be managed using the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP). The information is represented in a tree format.
margin
The allowance for attenuation in addition to that explicitly accounted for in system design.
master controller (MC)
The system's master controller (MC) card.

Mbps
Mega bits per second

MC
See master controller (p. GL-16) for definition.

MD4H
A PSS-1 Multiservice Dual module unit with 4 client ports per module, which is temperature
Hardened.
mean time between failures (MTBF)
The expected average time between failures usually expressed in hours.

mean time to repair (MTTR)
The average time that it takes until a failure is repaired. MTTR is usually expressed in hours.
media access control (MAC)
The MAC address is a computer's unique hardware number. The MAC address is used by the
media access control sublayer of the data link layer of telecommunications protocols.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-16
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
mesh
A type of network configuration that combines ROADMs to support mesh channel connectivity
between the ROADMs without O-E-O for transmission. It is operated as a single NE with as
many as four degrees (bidirectional DWDM interfaces) that comprise two lines for the east and
two for the west.
MIB
See management information base (p. GL-16) for definition.

mid-stage access amplifier (MSA)
An MSA has two amplifier stages between which can be fibered a DCM/DCF card or an external
dispersion compensation unit.
modulation
A process that modifies the characteristic of one wave (the carrier) by another wave (the signal).
Examples include amplitude modulation (AM), frequency modulation (FM), and pulse-coded
modulation (PCM).
MSA
See mid-stage access amplifier (p. GL-17) for definition.

MTBF
See mean time between failures (p. GL-16) for definition.

MTTR
See mean time to repair (p. GL-16) for definition.

multimode fiber
An optical fiber that has a core large enough to propagate more than one mode of light. The
typical diameter is 62.5 micrometers.
multiplexer (MUX)
A device that combines two or more signals into a single output.

multiplexing
The process that transmits two or more signals over a single communications channel. Examples
include time-division multiplexing and wavelength-division multiplexing.
MUX
See multiplexer (p. GL-17) for definition.

muxponder
A networking device that multiplexes and transponds GbE signals.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE
See network element (p. GL-18) for definition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-17
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NEBS
See Network Equipment Building System requirements (p. GL-18) for definition.
network element (NE)
Processor-controlled entity of a telecommunications network that primarily provides switching

and transport network functions and contains network operations functions.
For 1830 PSS, a configuration of 1830 PSS equipment at a single site, addressed as a single entity,
and under the control of a single controller (NE). The types of NEs are ILA (in-line amplifier) and
ADM (add/drop multiplexer).
Network Element Management System (NMS)
The NMS provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a network,
including creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It has interfaces to
external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement
(SLA) management.
Network Equipment Building System requirements (NEBS)
Developed by Telcordia, standards that vendors must adhere to if they want to sell equipment to
the Regional Bell Operating Companies (RBOCs) and the Competitive Local Exchange Carriers
(CLECs).
network services
Services that the network provider creates only as infrastructure to support user services. For
example, a VPN network service is used to implement an Ethernet service.
network time protocol (NTP)
Internet protocol used to synchronize time between network equipment.

NMS
See Network Element Management System (p. GL-18) for definition.

node
A node (or network element) is a set of one or more Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelves that are
viewed as a single entity by the Network Management System. A node can be any of the
following:
up to two single optical shelves
a single electrical shelf
a single electrical shelf and one or more optical shelves
non-service affecting (NSA)
Refers to a condition that does not impact or interfere with network service.
NSA
See non-service affecting (p. GL-18) for definition.

NTP
See network time protocol (p. GL-18) for definition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-18
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OA
See optical amplifier (p. GL-20) for definition.

OAMP
Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning.

OC-n
See optical carrier level-n (p. GL-20) for definition.

Occupational Safety and Health Administration) (OSHA)
OSHA is the main American federal agency charged with the enforcement of safety and health
legislation.
OCHAN or OCh
See optical channel (p. GL-20) for definition.

ODU
See optical demultiplexer (p. GL-20) for definition.

ODU-k
An optical logical connection with a specific rate. The rate can be either ODU-10G or ODU-40G.
OEO
See optical-electrical-optical conversion (p. GL-21) for definition.

OOF
See out of frame (p. GL-21) for definition.

Open Systems Interconnection reference model (OSI)
A seven-layer model that pertains to the logical structure for communications networks
standardized by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). Adherence to the
standard enables any OSI-compliant system to communicate with any other OSI-compliant
system.
Operations Support System (OSS)
A management system supporting a specific management function, such as alarm surveillance or

provisioning, in a carrier network. Many OSSs are large centralized systems running on
mainframes or minicomputers.
OPR
See optical path restoration (p. GL-20) for definition.

OPS
See optical protection switch (p. GL-20) for definition.

optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)
An OADM is a network element which allows a WDM transmission link to add or drop optical
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-19
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
signals, without converting the photonic stream into an electrical signal. Insertion and extraction
are done using optical filters or demultiplexers. An OADM can be either non-reconfigurable or
reconfigurable; in the latter case, optical switches need to be used.
optical amplifier (OA)
A device that amplifies an input optical signal without converting it into electrical form.
optical carrier level-n (OC-n)
A carrier rate specified in the SONET standard, where n is a numeric.

optical cell
A number of nodes connected by fiber in a predefined manner to provide route diversity to each
node. The simplest form of optical cell is a ring. Statically allocated wavelengths are assigned
within the context of one cell.
optical channel (OCHAN, Och)
An optical wavelength band for WDM optical communications.

optical demultiplexer (ODU)
Value/indicator used for an optical demultiplexer.

optical path protection (OPP)
A protection path is defined when the connection is set up. When a fault is detected on the path,
there is a switch-over from the working path to the protection path to restore the traffic.
optical path restoration (OPR)
A recovery scheme that dynamically finds a protection path when a fault is detected. This method
is usually not capable of matching SDH/SONET recovery time periods (for example, 50 ms).
optical power meter
An instrument that measures the amount of optical power present at the end of a fiber or cable.
optical protection switch (OPS)
An optical circuit pack that provides WDM protection.

optical signal to noise ratio (OSNR)
The ratio between the optical signal power of the data signal and the power of the optical noise
signal.
optical supervisory channel (OSC)
A designated optical channel used to carry communications related to maintenance and

operational functions of the network rather than customer traffic.
The OSC supports the following communications: node-to-node, interworking, client LAN, and
orderwire communication.
optical transponder (OT)
An OT is a circuit pack that performs optical-to-electrical to optical (OEO) conversion.

OTs perform frequency adaptation between 1830 PSS equipment and external equipment that is
not optically compatible with 1830 PSS Transport. OTs also provide 3R functionality (retiming,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-20
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
reshaping, reamplification) and perform fault management and performance monitoring

(non-intrusive monitoring) on the SONET/SDH and WaveWrapper signal.
optical transport network (OTN)
A fiber-optic network designed to transport customer traffic, such as an SDH or SONET network.
See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (p. GL-28) and Synchronous Optical Network
(p. GL-28) for examples.
optical-electrical-optical conversion (OEO)
The process of converting an optical signal to an electrical equivalent and then back to optical
data.
orderwire
A section of the supervisory signal that is used for communication between sites.
OSC
See optical supervisory channel (p. GL-20) for definition.

OSHA
See Occupational Safety and Health Administration) (p. GL-19) for definition.
OSI
See Open Systems Interconnection reference model (p. GL-19) for definition.
OSNR
See optical signal to noise ratio (p. GL-20) for definition.

OSP
See outside plant (p. GL-21) for definition.

OSS
See Operations Support System (p. GL-19) for definition.

OT
See optical transponder (p. GL-20) for definition.

OTN
See optical transport network (p. GL-21) for definition.

out of frame (OOF)
A state in which the frame alignment sequence of an SDH/SONET frame has not been found for
several consecutive frames.
outside plant (OSP)
Refers to outside the central office/building premises.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-21
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PCS
See physical coding sublayer (p. GL-22) for definition.

PDL
See polarization dependent loss (p. GL-22) for definition.

PDU
See protocol data unit (p. GL-23) for definition.

performance monitoring (PM)
Measures the quality of service and identifies any degrading or marginally operating systems
(before an alarm would be generated).
photonic cross-connect (PXC)
A fiber cross-connect that operates without optical-electrical-optical conversion. It can have one
or more wavelengths on each fiber or port.
photonic protection switch (PPS)
By provisioning of PPS cards (or optical splitters), automatic protection switch (APS) are
automatically created.
physical coding sublayer (PCS)
PCS layer monitoring used for Ethernet/FC ports.

PM
See performance monitoring (p. GL-22) for definition.

PMD
See polarization mode dispersion (p. GL-22) for definition.

point-to-point transmission
The transmission between two designated stations.

polarization dependent loss (PDL)
Loss of optical power that occurs during the polarization process. Polarized light waves are light
waves in which the vibrations occur in a single plane. The process of transforming unpolarized
light into polarized light is known as polarization (the orientation of the electric and magnetic
field vectors of a propagating electro-magnetic wave).
polarization mode dispersion (PMD)
PMD is an inherent property of all optical media. It is caused by the difference in the propagation
velocities of light in the orthogonal principal polarization states of the transmission medium. The
net effect is that if an optical pulse contains both polarization components, then the different
polarization components will travel at different speeds and arrive at different times, smearing the
received optical signal.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-22
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PPS
See photonic protection switch (p. GL-22) for definition.

protocol data unit (PDU)
A device used for the information exchange between equal protocol layers.
provisioning
Placing and configuring hardware and software required to activate a telecommunications service
for a customer. If the equipment is in place, provisioning may consist of creating or modifying a
customer record in a database to activate the services.
PXC
See photonic cross-connect (p. GL-22) for definition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
QoS
See quality of service (p. GL-23) for definition.

quality of service (QoS)
A set of performance parameters that characterize the transmission quality over a given virtual
connection.
QoS can be quantitatively indicated by channel or system performance parameters, such as
signal-to-noise ratio, bit error ratio, message throughput rate, and call blocking probability.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
rack
A rack is the standardized physical framework on which network equipment such as

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelves are mounted. A rack can contain more than one shelf. Also
called bay frames.
random jitter (RJ)
Random jitter is caused by thermal noise and may be modeled as a Gaussian process. The
peak-to-peak value of RJ is of a probabilistic nature, and thus any specific value requires an
associated probability.
receiver
A terminal device that includes a detector and signal processing electronics. It functions as an
optical-to-electrical converter.
receiver sensitivity
The minimum optical power required at a receiver to deliver traffic at a guaranteed bit error rate
(BER). This parameter is specified back-to-back (without the effects of chromatic dispersion or
OSNR degradation).
reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)
An optical network element with a configuration that can be changed remotely. The main benefit
of this remote reconfigurability is that it reduces Operating Expenditures (OPEX) when operating
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-23
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
a DWDM network. OPEX is reduced because the ROADM eases network provisioning and line
tuning at both the initial installation and any upgrades (to increase the capacity or re-allocate
resources to a new demand matrix).
regeneration
Electrical signal regeneration. Typically, OTUk Section regeneration and ODUk transparency is
implied in this context.
remote network monitoring (RMON)
Provides statistics for remote performance monitoring. Defined in standard RFC 2819.
repeater
A receiver and transmitter set designed to amplify attenuated signals. Repeaters are used to extend
operating range. See in-line amplifier (p. GL-13) for related term.
request for comment (RFC)
A document that describes the specifications of a technology. RFCs are used by the Internet
Engineering Task Force (IETF) and other standards bodies.
restoration domain
A part of the network where traffic restoration is provided in isolation from the rest of the
network.
RFC
See request for comment (p. GL-24) for definition.

RIP
See routing information protocol (p. GL-24) for definition.

RJ
See random jitter (p. GL-23) for definition.

RMON
See remote network monitoring (p. GL-24) for definition.

ROADM
See reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (p. GL-23) for definition.

routing information protocol (RIP)
RIP is an interior gateway protocol defined by the IETF (RIPv1 - RFC 1058 and RIPv2 - 2453)
that specifies how routers exchange routing table information. RIP is a routing protocol based on
the distance vector algorithm. With RIP, routers periodically exchange entire tables.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SA
See service affecting (p. GL-25) for definition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-24
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SAN
See storage area network (p. GL-28) for definition.

SC
See shelf controller (p. GL-26) for definition.

scattering
The change of direction of light rays or photons after striking small particles. It may also be
regarded as the diffusion of a light beam caused by the inhomogeneity of the transmitting
material.
SCOT
See software control of transmission (p. GL-27) for definition.

SDH
See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (p. GL-28) for definition.

secure shell (SSH)
An encrypted method of transmitting data.

segment
A pair of OSP fibers connecting two sites.

SELV
Safety extra low voltage.

service affecting (SA)
Refers to a condition that impacts or interferes with network service.

Service Level Agreement (SLA)
A contract between a network service provider and a customer that specifies, usually in
measurable terms, what services the network service provider will provide.
services
Within the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 system, services can be offered directly to end customers
or be used internally to a network as transport infrastructure.
SFC
See static filter, CWDM (p. GL-27) for definition.

SFD
See static filter, DWDM (p. GL-28) for definition.

SFP
See small form-factor pluggable module (p. GL-26) for definition.

shared risk group (SRG)
A shared risk group is a group of items that are likely to be affected by a single fault. The items
therefore share the risk of experiencing the fault.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-25
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
shelf
A shelf is a mechanical facility that is in general a housing for circuit packs. Shelves are housed in
Bays.
An Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 node consists of one or more physical shelves equipped with
cards. The shelf provides a chassis or cage with a backplane that can contain multiple cards. The
shelf is mounted in a rack. Each shelf has a shelf controller card, plus its redundant mate. Every
node has one shelf that has its shelf controllers designated as the master controller for the node.
The node appears as a single point in the network topology to the network management system.
Connections between nodes use network links. See node (p. GL-18) for related term.
shelf controller (SC)
The SC card in a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf.

signaling transfer point (STP)
A node in a common channel signalling network with the function of transferring messages from
one signalling link to another and considered exclusively from the viewpoint of the transfer
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
SNMP is the protocol used to communicate between the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 nodes and
the NMS. The SNMP traffic is carried over the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 control network.
simplex
A single element (for example, a simplex connector is a single-fiber connector).

single-mode fiber (SMF)
A type of fiber which is very small in diameter and allows the light to be reflected in a single way
along the lightguide such that there is coherence in the arrival of the light signal.
site
The termination location of OSP cables. Each site can contain one or more NEs and one or more
glass-through connections.
SLA
See Service Level Agreement (p. GL-25) for definition.

small form-factor pluggable module (SFP)
An optical modular, hot-pluggable transceiver (compatible with IEEE-802.3z) designed for use
with small form factor (SFF) connectors, offering high speed and physical compactness. SFP
transceivers perform at data speeds of up to 5 gigabits per second, and possibly higher.
The SFP modules can be easily interchanged, therefore, electro-optical or fiber optic networks can
be upgraded and maintained more conveniently than has been the case with traditional soldered-in
modules. Rather than replacing an entire circuit board containing several soldered-in modules, a
single module can be removed and replaced for repair or upgrading. This can result in a
substantial cost savings, both in maintenance and in upgrading efforts.
SMF
See single-mode fiber (p. GL-26) for definition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-26
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SNCP
See Sub-Network Connection Protocol (p. GL-28) for definition.

SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol (p. GL-26) for definition.

software control of transmission (SCOT)
System software that controls the settings of EDFA pumps, VOAs, Raman pumps, DCM pumps,
DGEFs, and blockers in the ROADM NEs.
software generic (SW generic)
The whole software and (static) data associated with a particular NE release.
SONET
See Synchronous Optical Network (p. GL-28) for definition.

SONET wavelength service
The SONET wavelength service provides transport of SONET signals through the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 network.
span
A fiber link between NEs that can be unidirectional or bidirectional, depending on the network
design. Multiple segments in tandem are connected by glass-through connections.
span loss
Loss (in dB) of optical power due to the span transmission medium (includes fiber loss and splice
losses).
splice
A permanent connection of two optical fibers through fusion or mechanical means.

SRG
See shared risk group (p. GL-25) for definition.

SSH
See secure shell (p. GL-25) for definition.

SSMF
See standard single-mode fiber (p. GL-27) for definition.

ST
See straight-tip connector (p. GL-28) for definition.

standard single-mode fiber (SSMF)
This is the most common type of fiber deployed. This fiber was designed to provide zero
chromatic dispersion at 1310 nm, to support the early long-haul transmission systems operating at
this wavelength. It has a chromatic dispersion of at most 20 ps/(nm*km) in the 1550 nm
wavelength range and usually around 17 ps/(nm*km).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-27
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
static filter, CWDM (SFC)
A static filter card used with a CWDM circuit pack.

static filter, DWDM (SFD)
A static filter card used with a DWDM circuit pack.

storage area network (SAN)
A high-speed special-purpose network (or subnetwork) that interconnects different kinds of data
storage devices with associated data servers on behalf of a larger network of users.
STP
See signaling transfer point (p. GL-26) for definition.

straight-tip connector (ST)
Fiber optic connector that uses a bayonet-style coupling rather than a screw-on coupling.
STS, STS-n
See synchronous transport signal-n (p. GL-28) for definition.

Sub-Network Connection Protocol (SNCP)
An SDH version of UPSR. See SDH and UPSR.

SW generic
See software generic (p. GL-27) for definition.

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
A family of digital transmission rates used outside of the U.S. and Japan from 51.84 Mbps to 40
Gbps that allows the interconnection of transmission products around the world.
SDH is the standard technology for synchronous data transmission on optical media. It is the
international equivalent of Synchronous Optical Network (SONET). Both SDH and SONET
technologies provide faster and less costly network interconnection than traditional
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) equipment.
Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)
A North-American standard developed by Telecordia and adapted by ANSI for the optical
long-distance networks.
SONET is the interface standard for synchronous optical-fiber transmission, applicable to the
physical layer of the OSI reference model. SONET has a basic bit rate of 51.840 Mbps, called
OC-1, that is used to define higher rates (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, and so on) carried as a channel on
an optical fiber.
synchronous signal
A data signal that is sent along with a clock signal.

synchronous transport signal-n (STS, STS-n)
The basic logical building block signal with a rate of 51.840 Mbps for an STS-1 signal and a rate
of n times 51.840 Mbps for an STS-n signal (where n is a numeric).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-28
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
tap
The entry point into a system module.

target identifier (TID)
A provisionable parameter used to identify an NE within a TL1 command.

TCA
See threshold crossing alert (p. GL-29) for definition.

TCP
See Transmission Control Protocol (p. GL-30) for definition.

TCP/IP
A suite of several networking protocols developed for the Internet that provides communication
across interconnected networks, between computers with diverse hardware architectures and
various operating systems. Some examples are FTP, SMTP, and SNMP.
TDM
See time-division multiplexing (p. GL-29) for definition.

Telecommunications Management Network (TMN)
A network that interfaces with a telecommunications network at several points to receive

information from, and to control the operation of, the telecommunications network.
thermal noise
Noise resulting from thermally induced random fluctuation in the receiver's load resistance
current.
threshold crossing alert (TCA)
A condition set when a counter exceeds a user-selected high or low threshold. A TCA does not
generate an alarm but is available on demand through the CIT.
TID
See target identifier (p. GL-29) for definition.

time-division multiplexing (TDM)
A multiplexing technique whereby two or more channels are derived from a transmission medium
by dividing access to the medium into sequential intervals. Each channel has access to the entire
bandwidth of the medium during its interval. This implies that one transmitter uses one channel to
send several bit streams of information.
TL1 (Transaction language 1)
An OS/NE machine-to-machine language. TL1 messages are expressed as ASCII strings. TL1
messages and syntax are defined by Telecordia.
TMN
See Telecommunications Management Network (p. GL-29) for definition.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-29
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TOADM
See tunable optical add/drop multiplexer (p. GL-30) for definition.

topology
The pattern of interconnections between nodes in a network, such as a ring or hub. A network
topology database contains information regarding each link in the network.
traffic grooming
Traffic can be consolidated, aggregated, or separated to achieve efficiencies of routing.

Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
A protocol used with the Internet Protocol to send data in the form of message units between
computers over the Internet. While IP handles the actual delivery of the data, TCP keeps track of
the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing
through the Internet.
traps (SNMP)
SNMP traps are unacknowledged events sent from an agent to a manager. In a Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 network, the agent is the node and the manager is EMS.
tunable optical add/drop multiplexer (TOADM)
A tunable ROADM that yields the ultimate in operational flexibility, especially when used in
conjunction with transponders with tunable wavelength lasers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UDP
See user datagram protocol (p. GL-31) for definition.

UL
See Underwriters Laboratories (p. GL-30) for definition.

Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
A U.S. non-profit privately owned and operated product safety testing and certification
organization. Develops standards and test procedures for products, materials, components,
assemblies, tools and equipment, chiefly dealing with product safety.
unidirectional path-switched ring (UPSR)
A survivable, closed loop transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node failures
by providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. Adjacent nodes on the ring
are interconnected using a single pair of optical fibers. One fiber transports traffic in one direction
(for example, clockwise), while the second fiber transports traffic in the opposite direction (for
example, counterclockwise). In a UPSR, the source node bridges its outgoing traffic along
opposite directions around the ring (on paths provided by SONET synchronous transport
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-30
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
channels). In contrast to BLSR, a UPSR:
is path-specific as opposed to line specific
does not allow extra traffic (because traffic is bridged)
requires less coordination from source to destination (because the destination network
element can make all its decisions without involving the source)
UPSR
See unidirectional path-switched ring (p. GL-30) for definition.

user datagram protocol (UDP)
A minimal, datagram-oriented, transport network protocol above the IP network layer that does
not guarantee data ordering or delivery. Because it is datagram-oriented, each send operation by
the application results in the transmission of a single IP datagram. This contrasts with the
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) which is byte stream oriented and guarantees the delivery
and ordering of the bytes sent. Because it is a byte stream oriented, a single send operation may
result in a no IP datagrams (buffering), a single IP datagram, or multiple IP datagrams.
user services
Services that the network provider can sell to their customers, such as Ethernet service.
UTC
Coordinated universal time.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
variable optical attenuator (VOA)
A device used to set the attenuation of the power received over a fiber to a level required by the
receiving equipment.
VCAT
See virtual concatenation (p. GL-31) for definition.

very short reach (VSR)
A SONET/SDH interface that provides a low-cost interconnection solution of less than 300
meters between routers, switches, and DWDM systems.
virtual concatenation (VCAT)
Defines an inverse multiplexing procedure whereby the contiguous bandwidth is broken into
individual Virtual Containers (VC) at the source transmitter and logically represented in a Virtual
Concatenation Group (VCG). VCG members are transported as individual VCs across the
SONET/SDH network and recombined at the destination VCG receiver. While contiguous
concatenation requires concatenation functionality at each network element, virtual concatenation
do not.
virtual time-slot (VTS)
1830 PSS-1 GBEH Edge Device has a fixed assignment of 10 Virtual Time Slots to each line port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-31
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VOA
See variable optical attenuator (p. GL-31) for definition.

VSR
See very short reach (p. GL-31) for definition.

VTS
See virtual time-slot (p. GL-31) for definition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
wave division multiplexing (WDM)
WDM merges optical traffic onto one common fiber, sending several signals through one fiber
with different wavelengths of light. WDM allows flexibility in expanding bandwidth. It reduces
costly mux/demux function, and it reuses existing optical signals.See dense wave division
multiplexing (DWDM).
wave key
A component of the Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability that is used to identify individual
wavelengths through the network.
A wave key is a number between 1 and 2048. Each WDM wavelength in a 1830 PSS-32 network
is uniquely identified by a pair of wave keys.
waveguide
A material medium that confines and guides a propagating electromagnetic wave.

waveguide coupler
A coupler that transfers light between planar waveguides.

wavelength
The distance between points of corresponding phase of two consecutive cycles of a wave,
typically measured in nanometers (nm). The wavelength is related to the propagation velocity and
the frequency. (Also called lambda.)
wavelength growth
A type of growth in which all eight wavelengths are added to a single line before more lines are
added.
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability is a patented feature of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32

which allows for the tracking of wavelengths through the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 network,
and for the measuring of the wavelengths' optical power levels at certain points along their paths.
WaveWrapper
WaveWrapper provides network management functions such as optical-layer performance

monitoring, error correction, and ring protection on a per-wavelength basis.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-32
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WDM
See wave division multiplexing (p. GL-32) for definition.

WDM demand
The termination points and signal type of a service that is to be carried by the WDM network.
WDM line
A contiguous series of spans terminated by a ROADM at each end. A WDM line can be a single
span or a series of spans joined by the in-line amplifiers (ILAs).
Web user interface (WebUI)
A computer interface that provides web-based access to the network element (NE).
WebUI
See Web user interface (p. GL-33) for definition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
XFP (10-gigabit small form factor pluggable module)
A pluggable optical transceiver module that combines transmitter and receiver functions in one
compact, flexible, and low cost package format. Up to sixteen XFP modules can be arranged on a
typical rack card, allowing for an unprecedented level of data density. XFP is protocol
independent, are can support OC-192/STM-64, 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 10 Gigabit Fibre Channel,
and G.709 data streams in routers, switches and network cards. Reaches ranging from Very Short
Reach (VSR) to Long Reach (LR) can also be supported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Y-coupler
A coupler that has three waveguide legs joined at the center in a Y shape which connects an
input port to two output ports or two-input ports to a single output port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ZIC (zero-installation craft)
An NE-imbedded graphical user interface (GUI) application for local operation and maintenance.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-33
Issue 1 June 2013
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-34
Issue 1 June 2013
Index
A about this document, xix
.............................................................
.............................................................
L loopback IP address, 4-24
B Before you begin, 2-2
.............................................................
.............................................................
N NE date and time, 4-38
C Cleaning optical connectors, A-3
.............................................................
Cleaning other optical

components, A-7
R rack installation, 2-7

.............................................................
CLI access, 4-12

configure GNE for management
system access, 4-31
configure system properties, 4-55
S SDH mode, 4-23
Shelf cover installation, 2-105

software environment, 4-14
.............................................................
.............................................................
E example configuration of ftp
U update firmware, 4-49
server, 4-57
.............................................................
F Fiber cleaning, A-3
.............................................................
G Glossary, GL-1
.............................................................
I
ID module replacement, 2-46

initialize database, 4-7
Inspecting optical connectors, A-6
Installation and Provisioning of
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-4, 2-26
Installation and Replacement, 2-18
installation and seat packs, 2-45
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-1
Issue 1 June 2013
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-2
Issue 1 June 2013

1830 Photonic Service Switch 4 (PSS-4) Rel 6.0 Installation and System Turn-Up Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1830 Photonic Service Switch 4 (PSS-4) Rel 6.0 Installation and System Turn-Up Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Title page

Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules

How to use this document

Safety information ....................................................................................................................................................................... xx

Related information ................................................................................................................................................................... xxi

Technical support ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxiii

ID module replacement ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-46

Line Driver Port Attributes

Replacing a card ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-53

11DPE12, 11DPE12A and 11DPE12E Installation procedure

11QPA4 and 11QPA4A Installation procedure ............................................................................................................ 2-68

4DPA2/4DPA4 Installation Procedure ............................................................................................................................ 2-80

SPD Shelf Installation procedures

Fan and air filter installation

Stand-alone node set-up

Connect to the NE for CLI access .................................................................................................................................... 4-12

Configure networking information

Configure GNE for management system access ......................................................................................................... 4-31

Configure additional system properties .......................................................................................................................... 4-55

Perform power adjustments ................................................................................................................................................ 5-13

System Turn-up and commissioning

Commission a FOADM system ........................................................................................................................................ 6-23

Prepare unkeyed FOADM system for additional services ...................................................................................... 6-53

Set opposite port of Unidirectional Amplifier

Generate and review system loss report ......................................................................................................................... 6-67

Performance verification testing and data retrieval

Office power connection and cable color

Test and expected results

Power connection test and Results .................................................................................................................... 2-31

Shelf ID and Settings

Timing cable wire pin number description

E1 2MHz 1PPS ToD cable wire diagram

E1/DS1 2 MHz 1PPS ToD cable wire diagram ............................................................................................ 2-89

CIT cable pin assignments

Shelf ID and settings

Loss value field loss report explanations ........................................................................................................ 6-63

Notes field terms and definitions ....................................................................................................................... 6-64

Highlighting loss report rules

Minimum EPT parameters for network element

Loss report fields

Loss report error messages

Tools for cleaning optical fiber connectors

Nominal tightening torques ................................................................................................................................... B-1

Nominal tightening torques when using washers

PSS-4 slot number label (3KC13252AA) position

Showing compliance and safety warnings

eSFP plugged in 112PDM11 with extended cover (3KC13331AAAA)

Attenuator used on 112PDM11 with extended cover

E4PFACK card ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-20

Half slot adapter install tool - view1

Half slot adapter install tool - view2

Rear ground attachment point

Power cables installed (front cover open)

Power cables management to the left of the shelf

Power cables management beneath the shelf

Shelf ID ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-33

Short LC fiber boot ................................................................................................................................................. 2-35

Rear ground attachment point

CA-AC Power supply cable

Connecting CA-AC cable to AC cable adaptor ............................................................................................ 2-39

E4PFACK power input port

E4PFACK power input port - another view